JP2022142394A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing appropriate control on decorative pattern display control in a normal state after a game medium has not passed through a specific region in a special state.SOLUTION: In the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to a small winning game state as shown in Fig. 9-24, a performance control CPU 120 displays "2V2" in pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of an image display device 5 as a small winning combination of a decorative pattern corresponding to a display result of "small winning." In a start screen of a "normal mode" of normal states controlled after a small winning blowout is generated in a small winning state as shown in Fig. 9-25, the performance control CPU displays "222," which is a big winning combination of a decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 as a decorative pattern combination.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-25

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

For example, in Patent Document 1, when the V prize does not occur during the small winning game state, when the time saving state ends, the time saving end notification to notify that the time saving state has ended and the player hits left Disclosed is a gaming machine that executes a left-handed promotion notification prompting the player to return to the normal position and play a game.

JP 2018-99307 (paragraph 0073)

In a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Patent Document 1, when a game medium does not pass through a specific area (V win) in a special state (small win game state), an appropriate display corresponding to a change in the game state is provided. Control needs to be exercised.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provides a game machine that can be controlled to a special state and that performs appropriate display control when a game medium does not pass through a specific area. That's what it is.

The game machine of this means is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display),
Variable means (V judgment prize winning device 87) controlled to an enterable state in which a game medium (game ball) can enter;
An advantageous state (big win game state) advantageous to the player, a special state (small win game state) which is different from the advantageous state and in which the variable means is controlled to the enterable state (small win game state), and after the advantageous state A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled in a special state (time saving state), which is a game state to be controlled and has a higher frequency of executing variable display than in the normal state,
The state control means (CPU 103)
When the game medium that has entered the variable means passes through the specific area (V winning area 870), the advantageous state (jackpot game state) can be controlled,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when it is controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the normal state (time saving control 99 times after the big hit, the time saving state is small When a win occurs and V prize is not won during the small win game, control is made to the normal state when the small win game state ends),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a display result of variable display of decoration identification information on display means (image display device 5),
The display control means is
It is possible to display a specific display result (combination for a jackpot of decoration symbols (such as "333")) as the display result corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state when being controlled to the normal state on the display means. and
A special display result (combination of decorative symbols for a small win ("3V3", etc.)) is displayed on the display means as the display result corresponding to being controlled to the special state when being controlled to the special state. is possible and
When the game medium does not pass through the specific region in the special state while being controlled to the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state. (When the V prize is not won during the small winning game and the normal state is controlled, the combination for the big winning of decorative symbols (“333” etc.) is displayed on the image display device 5.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the specific display result is displayed in the normal state after the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, thereby making the player aware that the control is in the special state. be able to.

In addition, the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention and the configuration other than the matters specifying the invention. may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 09TM. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table, (B1) and (B2-1) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table, and (B2-2) is a small It is an explanatory view showing a hit via jackpot type determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the 1st to 99th rotations of the hyper rush mode, and (B) is a variation pattern determination table for the 1st to 4th rotations of the remaining hold in the hyper rush mode. It is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a game flow. It is a time chart which shows the control timing of the game state regarding a 1st flag, a 2nd flag, and a 3rd flag. It is a time chart which shows the control timing of the game state regarding a small hit puncture. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is an explanatory view showing a combination determination table for a big hit of decorative symbols. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the pattern stop motion production|presentation and the pattern stop sound production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation determination processing during a small hit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode table of promotion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the first promotion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a second promotion presentation; It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation determination processing at the time of the small hit completion|finish. 4 is a time chart showing an example of display control timing of result display; 4 is a time chart showing an example of display control timing of result display; FIG. 11 is a time chart showing a modified example of display control timing of result display; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a demonstration display effect determination process; FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution condition table for a customer waiting demonstration effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution period determination table for a restoration notification effect. It is a time chart showing the execution timings of effects when a V winning occurs and when a small winning blowout occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode when a V winning occurs and when a small hit blowout occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode when a V winning occurs and when a small hit blowout occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode when a V winning occurs and when a small hit blowout occurs. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the performance when power failure occurs during the small winning game and when the small winning blowout occurs after recovery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when power failure generate|occur|produces during a small-hit game, and when a small-hit puncture occurs after recovery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a game flow.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of Effect, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (ReadOnlyMemory) 101, a RAM (RandomAccessMemory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (VideoRAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be described. As for the characteristic portion 152F, a technique for a pachinko machine capable of setting different set values such as the probability of winning a jackpot with different degrees of advantage for the player by the setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player as the set value of the winning probability of the big win. .

First, setting values will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the odds of winning a jackpot change depending on the set value when a person on the game hall side (such as a store clerk at the game hall) changes settings using operating means such as predetermined switches. It is configured.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed to change the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, the setting change process that allows the probability of winning the big hit to be changed is executed. The set value consists of six stages (multiple stages) from 1 to 6, for example, and the probability of winning a big hit increases in the order of set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4<set value 5<set value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the degree of advantage increases in the order of setting value 2<setting value 3<setting value 4<setting value 5<setting value 6. increase step by step. It should be noted that the set values are not limited to six stages as long as they are provided in a plurality of stages. Since the ball output rate (the number of balls output per unit time (the number of prize balls)) changes in accordance with the possibility of changing the winning probability of the big hit in this way, changing the setting value changes the ball output rate. It can also be said that it is to do.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high setting with a high probability of winning a big win, and setting values 1 to 3 are called low setting with a low probability of winning a big win.

Also, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may be changed by setting the set values 1 to 6 in the same manner as the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win. The selection probability of the variation pattern may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win.

Regarding the characteristic portion 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of set values can be set, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is hit (jackpot or small hit). There is a case where a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled by hit is stored is executed. Concretely, the pending series is the pending information that exists when the big win occurs, and there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the big win gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the big win occurred. It refers to continuous hits within the reservation information range in which the next hits occur continuously within the range of (reserved). In the case of a small win, a big win via a small win is made based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserve information of a small win can be said to be the reserve storage information of a win that will become a big win in the future. When such a holding series is executed, there is a case where an informing effect for informing that it is a holding series is executed.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F, the same reference numerals and explanations as those in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 are omitted, and different parts will be explained.

In the game area where the hit game ball can flow down, the first path of the downflow path for the game ball is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. A second route, which is different from the first route, is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 as viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right hitting. The first path may be called a left-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area. Also, the second path may be called a right-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the right side of the game area.

Note that the first route and the second route may be composed of different routes, or may be a route in which a part is shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 and the arrangement of the game nails in the game area.

The game ball fired from the ball shooting device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area is guided to the left game area along, for example, the arrangement of the game nails. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided as a structure into which game balls hit in the left game area of the game areas can enter. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5 . The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting opening switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which game balls hit into the right game region of the game regions can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second starting winning hole in which game balls can win. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered the respective passage gates 41, there is a gate switch 21 inside the passage gate 41, a second start opening switch 22B inside the second start winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87. A V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure into which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, normal symbols are variably displayed. The normal pattern will be described later. In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for judging V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and a state in which a game ball passes through it can be visually recognized. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width that allows game balls to pass in the front-rear direction at the top, and walls are formed on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A part is provided, and a guide path along which game balls are guided is formed. In the central part of the guide, when a small hit is made, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 times open period + 1 second closed period (interval period) × 9 times + 1 second end period) By repeating opening and closing, an operation opening is formed as an opening that allows a total of about 10 or more game balls to win within a predetermined period of time during which the opening is open. In the path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball to be guided are provided on both sides of the wall portion in a manner that alternately protrudes, so that when hitting to the right A structure (hereinafter referred to as deceleration structure) is formed in which the game balls slowly flow through the passage above the operation opening of the upper portion of the V judgment winning device 87 .

In the small hit game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until it is detected that 10 game balls have entered the V judgment winning device 87, or until a predetermined period of time elapses. Opening control is executed. In the V-judgment winning device 87 , the portion of the guideway where the operating opening is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873 . A movable portion 872 capable of moving back and forth over the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. In the state where the operation port is closed by the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened by the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port is opened in the guideway, so that the game ball guided to the guideway can drop from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 (actuation opening), a V prize winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center of the bottom of the V judgment prize winning device 87 in the horizontal direction as a prize winning region in which a game ball entering from the operation opening can win. Further, an inclined path is provided to guide all the game balls entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 by an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide downward the gaming ball entering from the V winning opening.

At the uppermost end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided. there is The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and is capable of advancing and retreating to open and close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 can drop into the V winning area 870 . On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening is closed by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. , and can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state. When the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87 a provided in the V winning area 870 . In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning prize area 870 after that is within the winning ball area. will enter the A game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected by the V judgment prize switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment prize prize switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a reaches 10, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 opened in the small winning game state is closed, and the game ball enters. made impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge in the lower part, and a game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is discharged into a predetermined area inside the game board 2. It is discharged to the discharge channel. The discharge passage is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b capable of detecting discharged game balls, and all the discharged game balls are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball enters the V prize winning region 870 and is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , the conditions for generating a big hit are established, and the game is controlled to a big-hit game state. Winning of a game ball to such a V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, during the period in which a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened as described above, a total of about 10 game balls are produced on average without requiring any special operation. can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area It is structurally designed to enter the 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, right-hand hitting promotion notification is executed to instruct right-hand hitting so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. be.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, except when the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 and when the player hits to the left, it is possible to hit to the right. In this case, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation opening that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small winning game state In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operation opening is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87.例文帳に追加Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a game ball hit into the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that a game ball hit into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the game area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Also, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nail being planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered with a rectangular door, and when a big hit occurs, the solenoid tilts the door forward about the bottom side to reveal the big winning opening ( opening). Inside the special variable winning ball device 7, a count switch 23 is provided for detecting entering game balls. To the special variable winning ball device 7, a winning route is defined by a game nail or other structures so that a game ball can enter the big winning opening only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that even if the game ball is struck in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win the big prize opening.

The big hit is when the big win pattern (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when the big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. occurs in When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting winning hole, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big hit is also generated when a game ball entered while the operation opening of the V judgment prize device 87 is open due to the small win game state entering the V prize area 870. - 特許庁Hereinafter, when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, this is referred to as V winning. A small win is a win in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operation opening is opened is called a "small hit game state". Then, in the small win game state, a big win generated based on the fact that the game ball wins V is called a "big win via a small win". On the other hand, a big hit game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is called "big hit by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player as a given value, and the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state for a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. Repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a predetermined condition for terminating the open state (a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the establishment of the opening end condition that the winning ball of 1) has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is established, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is established (for example, the game ball is After passing (including winning) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening as the starting winning area, the condition for starting the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is The game is started based on establishment of a state of non-execution and non-execution of a jackpot game, and after a fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, a display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes the game ball entering (winning) the winning opening. is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means finally stopping display (determined display) of the pattern (an example of the identification information).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, it is still started within the range of the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information about variable displays for which the conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "reserved storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been retained. A pending memory is also called a starting memory or a starting winning memory.

As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening. As for the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening. When a big win occurs in a state where such a first reserve memory or a second reserve memory exists, the reserve memory that existed before the occurrence of the big win is maintained as it is, and a variable display is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. used for

When the second start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, even if there is a pending memory of the first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is preferentially executed. be. Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a second reserve consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entering the second start winning opening, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second holding indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit up by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, there is provided a first reservation display 25A consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening, that is, the first reservation memory number. . The first pending indicator 25A increases the number of indicator lights by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game balls so as to selectively use "left shot" aiming at the left game area and "right shot" aiming at the right game area. A game state and a performance state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts playing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player takes a seat in the pachinko game machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball wins the first start winning hole by striking to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a big hit (big hit by the special symbol), the left-hand shot is switched to the right-hand shot, and the game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 which is opened. . After the jackpot game state is over, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a message such as “Aim right” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

During the jackpot game state, a game is played aiming at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by striking to the right. During the jackpot game state, right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state is over, the game is continued by hitting to the right when the later-described time-saving state is reached. After the jackpot game is finished, if the time saving state is set, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加In addition, during the time saving state, right-handed promotion information is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hit is switched to the left-hand hit by the end of the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state, and the game ball wins the first start prize-winning port. Play games like this. In addition, when the time saving state does not occur, left-handed promotion notification (also called left-handed notification) is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to return to left handed and play the game. may

During the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole by striking to the right. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole and the display result is a big win (a big win by a special symbol), the game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right. Also, if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening and the display result becomes a small winning display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the small winning game state, so V judgment is made while striking to the right. A game is played aiming at the winning device 87 . At the start of the small-hit game state, a small-hit start notification is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the start of the small-hit game state. In addition, when it is controlled to the small hit game state, the start timing of the small hit display executed before the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the game situation (depending on the game situation) , or at a predetermined timing before the execution of the small hit display), the right hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the open state due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operation opening into the V judgment prize winning device 87, enters the V prize winning area 870 and is detected, When a V prize is generated, a big win is generated via a small win. When the V winning occurs, the V winning notification for notifying that the V winning has occurred is performed on the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁Further, when the small-hit game state ends, a small-hit end notification for notifying that the small-hit game state has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 . After the end of the small win, a big win game state is entered and the special variable winning ball device 7 is released, so the player plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right.

Further, when a game is played aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win is performed. does not occur. Thus, when V winning is not generated during the small winning game state, V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Further, at the end of the small winning game state, a small winning end notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning game state has ended. After the end of the small winning game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while striking to the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the game ball wins in the first start prize-winning hole by switching from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting. At the end of the time-saving state, a time-saving end notification for notifying that the time-saving is completed on the screen of the image display device 5 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to left-handed and play the game are performed.

FIG. 8-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, conditions for occurrence of a big win, a control state (game state) after a big win, the number of openings (number of rounds) in a big win, and the opening time of each round in a big win. In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 15R short-time big hit, the pattern 4R short-time big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R short-time big hit, the small hit 9 (8) R short-time big hit, and the small hit 5 (4) ) R time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state after the end of the small hit game state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R-time short jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R-time short jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R-short time jackpots via small hits with different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. be A small hit that is linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9 (8) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the second small hit. 5 (4) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the third small win.

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 .

The pattern 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The pattern 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). In the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 16 rounds, but the number of openings of the big prize opening is actually 15 times, and the player can win the same big hit as the pattern 15R short time jackpot with regard to opening the big prize opening. I feel categorical. 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the big jackpot is opened 8 times (8R) under the condition of V prize after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times). is. In the 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 4 times (4R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 5 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is actually opened is 4, and the player can get the same big hit as the pattern 4R short time jackpot with regard to the opening of the big prize opening. I feel categorical.

The time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1, and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set for . The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is once is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically, the time-saving state (including electric power supply state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make the game ball enter the passage gate 41 by striking to the right to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and to make the game ball win the variable winning ball device 6B in that state, such a variable winning ball device. It may take a long time to win the game ball to 6B, and the first special symbol retained and stored may be variably displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning, which can be stored up to four before the game state, one of the second special symbols which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display for batches can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined to be an advantageous big hit for the player. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After the big hit other than the 4R time-saving big hit, the end condition is that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is seven times, and the end condition is that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, 7 of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the variable display of the variable number of times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a big win advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is provided so that the game ball can win from the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more likely to flow down the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this. and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning slot than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and the small In other states such as a winning game state, the second route is more likely to win the variable winning slot than the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and in other game states, it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 8-3 shows the random number type, update range, use, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to give a big hit and whether or not to give a small win. The random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Type of jackpot (type, pattern 15R short-time jackpot, pattern 4R short-time jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R short-time jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R short-time jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Any type of R time-saving jackpot) and a jackpot pattern are determined (for jackpot type determination, jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the variation pattern (for determining the type of variation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design (for normal design hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the big hits in the specific game state are a symbol 15R short time big hit, a symbol 4R short time big hit, a small win via a 16 (15) R short time big hit, a small win via a 9 (8) R short time big hit, and a small hit. A plurality of types of Via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the random number for judging the hit (random R), or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for judging the big hit type (random 1) Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big win via a small win, the decided big win becomes invalid unless a V winning occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the random number 1 is also the random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Also, when it is determined to be the type of the small hit, the design of the small hit is determined at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a small winning symbol determination random number.

In addition, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2), and uses the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3), any included in the determined variation pattern type Determine the variation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type without reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with reach.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special prize determination table, a second special prize determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure hit determination table. The first special symbol winning judgment table is a data table for making a big winning judgment with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big winning judgment value to be compared with the random R is set. "Probability" shown in FIG. 8-4(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6.

FIG. 8-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure per determination table. The second special hit determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit with respect to the second special symbol, and is set with a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R. It is a table with The upper stage in FIG. 8-4(B) is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage in FIG. 8-4(B) is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper part of Fig. 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of Fig. 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the set value. In addition, you may provide a small hit in the 1st special design. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 124 is activated at a predetermined timing. is extracted (random R). As for the first start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the first special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the big hit judgment values, a big hit is given with respect to the first special pattern. to decide. As for the second start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the second special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, the second special pattern is given a big hit. to decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit determination value set in the second special hit determination table, and the extracted value matches any of the small hit determination values. If they match, it is decided to make a small win with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

8-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 8-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 8-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination, "symbol 15R short time jackpot" and "symbol 4R short time jackpot" A big hit determination value corresponding to each of the and is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to the “symbol 15R time-saving jackpot”, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (C) and (D), the big hit type determination value is also used as a judgment value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit design of the first special design and the second special design. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "8R short-time jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (E), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for judging the big hit type, "16 (15) R short time big hit via small hit" and " A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "9 (8) R short time big hit via small hit" and "5 (4) R short time big hit via small hit" is set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot via jackpot type determination table are the first jackpot (16 (15) R time short jackpot) and the second jackpot (9 (8) R time short jackpot). , is a temporary jackpot type linked to each of the third jackpots (5 (4) R short-time jackpots), and is invalid if V winning does not occur in the jackpot game state.

8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 8-5 and 8-6 show the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state.

Main commands will be explained in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6. The command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) specifying a variation pattern to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the command 80XX(H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result specifying commands that indicate display results including loss display results, big hit types, big hit display results for each small hit type, and small hit display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. The command 8F00(H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A1XX(H) is a special prize opening designation command indicating that the special prize opening is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a post-opening big winning hole designation command indicating after opening (closing) the big winning hole for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the game state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designation command that designates the first reserved storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved storage quantity designation command for designating a second reserved storage quantity. "XX" in the command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, when subtracting the number of reserved memories, transmits a reserved memory number designation command that designates the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but not limited to this, For each of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count, a reserved memory count subtraction designation command may be used that designates subtraction of 1 from the reserved memory count.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will occur, whether or not a small win will occur, and the determination result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

The command C401 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. The command C402(H) is a command designating the start of the second small hit. The command C403 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C501 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. Command C502 (H) is a command that designates the start of the second small hit. The command C503 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C601(H) is a V prize designation command that designates that there is a V prize. Command C602(H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that designates detection of winning balls (both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) to the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first pending storage buffer for storing the pending storage information of the first special symbol. In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the first reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

As for the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the second reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) as a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Execute the process to (store). Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first start winning slot. In addition, based on the winning of the second start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second reserve storage buffer. Executes the process of saving (storing) to Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserve storage buffer based on the winning of the second start winning slot.

Such storage of information relating to starting winnings in the pending storage buffer may be referred to as "stored pending." In addition, the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the reservation storage buffer at the time of the start winning, but at the start of the variation of the special symbol. You may make it extract.

FIG. 8-7 is a flow chart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process of S101. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of first reserved memories for counting the number of first reserved memories). whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, the random number for judging the jackpot (random R), the random number for deciding the jackpot type (random 1), the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern type (random 2), and the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a prize-winning effect process for judging in advance the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected first special symbol starting prize is executed thereafter (S1215).

In this embodiment, after the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning opening are stored as reserved storage information, the start condition for the variable display is When established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S110), based on the reserved storage information, the variable display result for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to start the variable display is determined as a big hit display result and the big hit type is determined based on the big hit determination value and the big hit type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S111) is based on the variation pattern type determination value set corresponding to the various random values and the variation pattern determination value. based on

On the other hand, apart from such determination, the timing before the start of the variable display based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, specifically, the game ball is the first starting winning opening Or at the timing of the start winning in the second start winning opening (the timing at which the retention memory information is stored), read ahead the retention memory information that stores the various data obtained at the time of the start winning, and based on the prefetched retention memory information Then, determination of whether or not a big win will occur, determination of whether or not a small win will occur, determination of the type of the big win, and determination of the type of variation pattern will be performed in advance according to the above-described various random numbers. Based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the variation pattern type determination value, a prize-winning effect process for prefetching determination is executed. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the result of the variable display in advance before the variable display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, the variable display of the performance symbols. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that gives a notice of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the game.

Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1216), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1218), sets the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the first reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1219).

By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 each time the start winning opening is started.

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command and A set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second starter switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second starter switch 22B is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of second reserved memories for counting the number of second reserved memories). whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated.

If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for jackpot determination (random R), a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the winning effect processing similar to the winning effect processing described in S1215 for the detected starting winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1226), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1228), sets the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the second reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1229).

By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Each time a start winning opening is entered, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start winning designation command and A set of four commands of the second reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process (S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer in S51, the process (S80) for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. will be On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. is done.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved storage, Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved storage.

Next, in RAM 102, CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer of RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of the save area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 store each random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like Also, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number=1, 2, 3, 4. It's like

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction (S59). ). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first start winning opening, that is, "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first special symbol. or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second start winning opening, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second special symbol , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processes in the special symbol process process, the process corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, it can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the random number buffer, and executes the judging module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for judging a big hit extracted in S1214 of the starting switch passing process or S1224 of the starting switch passing process and stored in the holding memory buffer or the random number buffer, and judges the big hit. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value or small-hit determination value with a random number for big-hit determination, and executes a process of determining a big-hit or a small-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing a process of judging a big hit or a process of judging a small hit.

In the big hit determination process, if the first special symbol matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the second special symbol will be one of the big hits shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) If it matches the judgment value, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of S61), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big win game state, but it also means to decide whether or not to make the stop pattern on the special pattern display device a big win pattern. .

If it is determined to be a big win in S61 (Y of S61), a big win flag indicating a big win is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", select the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (C) (S73), and proceed to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (if it indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (D) (S74). , S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type. Determine (S75) and proceed to S81.

Also, if the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating the "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (variation display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) By using the determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the small hit determination values, thereby performing small hit determination processing (S77). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. do. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. The jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches is determined as the jackpot via small hit type (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R short-time jackpot via small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating the 16 (15) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, the 9 (8) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R short-time jackpot via the small hit are the V prizes in the small hit game state. There is data that will be invalid without the occurrence of a big hit if a is not generated, and is provisionally set.

In S82, a special symbol stop symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5" and "9", which are the small hit patterns corresponding to the small hit type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 8-9 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S118). In the small hit opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable portion 872 in an open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small hit opening mode, and starts the opening operation of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small-hit start designation command indicating that the small-hit game state is started to the effect control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judging winning number counter as counting means in order to use the number of winnings to the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small win as a termination condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V winning number is performed. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning open process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 8-10 is a flow chart showing the small hit open process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit open control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter for counting the number of V winning prizes is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning ball number counter is set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit opening control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit open control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is opened by controlling the solenoid 22 corresponding to the time value of the small hit open control timer based on the open mode of the small hit. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V prize generated by the game ball entering from the V prize opening into the V prize area 870 which is in the open state inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected, the V prize is detected. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is on (S434). When it is on in S434, it means that V winning is detected, and the V winning flag which is set when V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball entering the V determination winning device 87 wins the V, the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game entering the V determination winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not turned on in S434, it means that V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15a is turned on (S438). When it is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball counter set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 8-9 is counted down to "-1" (S439), and a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is transmitted. (S440). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and the game that has entered the determination winning device 87 can be performed. It becomes possible to recognize the number of balls.

When the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small prize is satisfied because the number of V winning prizes of the small prize reaches the upper limit value, and When the small-hit open control timer times out in S432, it is when the small-hit opening end condition is established due to the end of the small-hit open control. At these times, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in a closed state, thereby closing the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the mode of opening the small win, the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes ``0''. The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit open control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit open control in the small hit open mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning valid period after closing the V judgment winning device 87 is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small winning end process ( S120) is updated (S443), and the process ends. As a result, the timing of the specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the closing of the V judgment winning device 87, is started. By setting the specific period as the V winning valid period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning area for some reason later than the normal passing time, the game ball can be detected. In addition, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally attempts to win a prize in the V winning area, it is only detected during that period, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 8-11 is a flow chart showing the small hit ending process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the process after the end of the small hit, the CPU 103 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when the V winning is already detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is operated to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. is turned on (S444). If it is not turned on in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is ON in S444, it means that V winning is detected during the V winning effective period, and a V winning flag indicating that V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and restore the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V win flag is set in S448, it is determined that the game is a big win, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As described above, in the small winning game state, if the player hits to the right in accordance with the right-handed promotion notification, which will be described later, the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the V judgment winning a prize. Since the game ball that has entered the device 87 always wins the V prize in the V prize area 870, the V prize flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 8-10). A jackpot flag is set and controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small win stored in the jackpot provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot will be legally awarded due to the occurrence of the V prize. formally stored in (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5) is set in the big winning hole control timer (S453).

In addition, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, depending on the jackpot type, the number of times of opening (eg, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (eg, 29 seconds), interval The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as the time (the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Of these data, the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the processing is terminated. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process is terminated. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 09TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 09TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-28.
In this embodiment, when the control is performed in the low base state (normal state), in the variable display in which the display result is "big hit", the combination of decorative patterns for the big hit (for example, "333", etc.) can be displayed.
Further, in the present embodiment, in the variable display in which the display result is "small hit" when being controlled to the high base state (time saving state), the combination of decorative patterns to be stopped and displayed is the decorative pattern for the small hit. Combinations (such as "3V3") can be displayed.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the high-base state (time-saving state) is controlled, the game medium (game ball) is placed in the small-hit game after the variable display in which the display result is "small-hit" is executed. When it is controlled to a low base state (normal state) without entering a V winning area, a combination of decorative patterns for a big win (such as "333") can be displayed as a combination of decorative patterns to be stopped and displayed.

[Board composition]
FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 9-1, a device for determining V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big win when a small win shown in FIG. 8-1 occurs, comprises a transparent member. The V-judgment winning device 87, which is a device in which the state of the game ball passing inside can be visually recognized, is provided with a V-judgment winning device LED 87L, and a predetermined timing (in this example, a small winning game promotion effect In the middle), the V winning determination device LED 87L is flashed (lighted) so that an accelerated flashing effect can be executed. Note that the description of the same parts as in FIG. 8-1 is omitted.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of different performance modes are provided as modes of the facilitating blinking performance. For example, a first accelerated flashing effect in which the V prize determination device LED 87L flashes in rainbow color with a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds, and a second accelerated flashing effect in which the V prize determination device LED 87L flashes in red with a flashing cycle of 2 seconds. (see later-described FIGS. 9-14 and 9-15).

[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 9-2 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. In the jackpot type table, for each jackpot type, the jackpot occurrence conditions, the control state after the jackpot (game state), the number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), the opening time of each round in the jackpot, the jackpot ending period (hereinafter referred to as appropriate) (referred to as "big hit ED period") and a small hit ending period (hereinafter referred to as "small hit ED period" as appropriate). In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 10R short-time big hit, the pattern 3R short-time big hit, 11 (10) R short-time big hit via small hit, 6 (5) R short-time big hit via small hit, and 4 (3) short-time big hit via small hit ) R time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state after the end of the small hit game state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. The big hits via small hits include "11 (10) R short-time big hits via small hits", "6 (5) R short-time big hits via small hits", and "4 (3) big hits via small hits" with different numbers of rounds in the big hits. R short time jackpot” is included.

In this example, the small hit linked so as to be the "11 (10) R time-saving big hit" is called the "first small win". A small hit that is linked so as to be a "6 (5) R short-time jackpot" is called a "second small win". A small hit that is linked so as to be a "4 (3) R short-time jackpot" is called a "third small win".

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. As the symbol jackpot, there are a "symbol 10R time-saving big hit" and a "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 .

The symbol 10R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 10 times (10R). The pattern 3R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened three times (3R). In the 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R) under the condition of V winning. The winning device is opened for 11 rounds, but the number of openings of the big winning opening is actually 10 times. I feel. 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit is a jackpot in which the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the big prize opening is opened five times (5R) under the condition of V prize winning. is. After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened three times (3R) under the condition of V winning. The winning device is opened for four rounds, but the number of openings of the big winning opening is actually three times. I feel.

The time saving state after the symbol 3R time saving jackpot is the end condition that the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special design is 1 time, and the end condition that the total number of times of fluctuation display times of the first special design and the second special design is 5 times ( (not shown) and two end states are set. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is once is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, basically, the time-saving state (including electric power supply state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make the game ball enter the passage gate 41 by striking to the right to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and to make the game ball win the variable winning ball device 6B in that state, such a variable winning ball device. It may take a long time to win the game ball to 6B, and the first special symbol retained and stored may be variably displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning, which can be stored up to four before the game state, one of the second special symbols which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display for batches can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined to be an advantageous big hit for the player. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

In addition, after the big hit with the pattern 10R short time jackpot and part of the 11 (10) R time short jackpot via the small hit, the end condition that the number of times the second special pattern is displayed is 99 times, and the first special pattern and the second Two end states are set, namely, the end condition (not shown) that the total number of variable display times with special symbols is 103 times. Such a number of times of 99 times of the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 99 times is a state in which the big hit via the next small win is substantially determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , Compared to the pattern 3R time-saving big hit, the number of times that the possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit is greatly increased. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 103 times is the second special symbol immediately after the start of the time saving state for the same reason as in the case of the symbol 3R time saving jackpot. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning, which can be stored up to four before the jackpot game state, before the condition for starting the variable display is established, it is advantageous for the player. This is to make it possible to surely execute the variation display of the number of variations for 99 times of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big hit.

In addition, after the big hit of the 11 (10) R time-saving big hit via the small hit, the 6 (5) R time-saving big hit via the small hit, and the 4 (3) R time-saving big hit via the small hit, the second special pattern Two ending conditions are set, that is, the end condition that the number of fluctuation display times is 7 times and the end condition (not shown) that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is 11 times. Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 3R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is the second special symbol immediately after the start of the time saving state for the same reason as in the case of the symbol 3R time saving jackpot. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning, which can be stored up to four before the jackpot game state, before the condition for starting the variable display is established, it is advantageous for the player. This is to make it possible to surely execute the variation display of the number of variations for seven times of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big hit.

10 seconds are set as a jackpot ending period (hereinafter referred to as “jackpot ED period” as appropriate) for the symbol 3R short-time jackpot and the symbol 10R short-time jackpot. In such a 10-second jackpot ED period, it is possible to execute a rush performance suggesting a performance mode to be controlled after the jackpot.

In addition, the small hit ending period of the 11 (10) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, the 6 (5) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, and the 4 (3) R short-time jackpot via the small hit (hereinafter referred to as "small hit ED period") is set to 5 seconds, and the jackpot ED period is set to 10 seconds. In such a small win ED period of 5 seconds, it is possible to execute a big win type notification effect of notifying the big win type and a result effect of displaying information related to the number of big wins and the total number of awarded balls. , during the jackpot ED period of 10 seconds, it is possible to execute a rush performance suggesting a performance mode to be controlled after the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is provided so that the game ball can win from the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a special state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (whether for starting winning or non-starting winning)) are the first. It is provided in the path and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning opening than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and In another state such as a small winning game state, the second route is easier to win the variable winning slot than the first route. It is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down, and in other game states, it is advantageous to the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

[Random value]
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-3, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number for variation pattern determination Numerical data indicating each of MR3, random number MR4 for judging the result of normal map display, and random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9-3, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of ~ MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns, etc. are stored.

[Display result determination table]
FIGS. 9-4 (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101 .

FIG. 9-4 (A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "[first special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the first special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for judging a big hit with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 is set. "Probability" shown in FIG. 9-4 (A1) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.
In this example, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/199.

FIG. 9-4 (A2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "[second special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the second special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit for the second special symbol, and is a big hit judgment value compared with the random number MR1 and a small hit judgment. A table with values. In FIG. 9-4 (A2), the upper stage is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a small hit.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/199. Also, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35. In addition, you may provide a small hit in the 1st special design. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 124 is activated at a predetermined timing. to extract the count value (random value MR1). For the first start winning prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the [first special symbol] display result judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the jackpot judgment values, regarding the first special symbol Decide to hit the jackpot. For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the [for the second special symbol] display result judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the jackpot judgment values, regarding the second special symbol Decide to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the [for the second special symbol] display result judgment table, and the extracted value is any small If it matches with the hit determination value, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

[Jackpot type determination table]
9-4 (B1), (B2-1), and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 9-4 (B1) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9-4 (B2-1) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9-4 (B2-2) is a small hit via big hit type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the big hit type of the small hit via big hit when it is determined to be a small hit by the second special symbol. is.

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol in FIG. 9-4 (B1) (hereinafter referred to as "[first special symbol] jackpot type determination table.)" A value to be compared with the big hit determination value corresponding to each of the "symbol 10R time-saving big hit" and the "symbol 3R time-saving big hit" is set.

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (B1) also shows the number of times of the time saving control executed after the big hits corresponding to the "symbol 10R time saving big hit" and the "symbol 3R time saving big hit". The "symbol 10R time saving big hit" has 99 times of time saving control, and the "symbol 3R time saving big hit" has one time saving control number. Hereinafter, the symbol 10R time-saving jackpot with the number of time-saving control times of 99 is appropriately referred to as “symbol 10R time-saving jackpot (99 times)”, and the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot with one time-saving control time is appropriately called “symbol 3R time-saving jackpot (1 times)”.

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 2 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (3%). , 3 to 299 are assigned to the “symbol 3R time-saving jackpot” (97%).

In the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 9-4 (B2-1) (hereinafter referred to as "[for the second special symbol] jackpot type determination table.), A random value for jackpot type determination A value to be compared with the value of MR2, and a big hit determination value corresponding to the "symbol 10R time-saving big hit" is set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 299 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (100%). .

9-4 (B2-2) for the second special symbol via a small hit via a big hit type determination table (hereinafter referred to as "[for the second special symbol] a small hit via a big hit type determination table.) A numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number MR2 for type determination, "11 (10) R short-time jackpot via small hit", "6 (5) R short-time jackpot via small hit", and "4 via small hit ( 3) A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "R short time big hit" is set.

In addition, in FIG. 9-4 (B2-2), “11 (10) R time-saving big hit via small hit”, “6 (5) R time-saving big hit via small hit” and “4 (3) R time-saving via small hit” The number of times of the time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to each "big hit" is also shown. "11 (10) R time-saving big hit via small hit" is 99 times or 7 times of time-saving control, "6 (5) R time-saving big hit via small hit" is 7 times of time-saving control, and "small hit Via 4 (3) R time-saving big hit” has seven times of time-saving control. In the following description, the 11 (10) R time-saving big hit via the small hit with the number of times of time saving control being 99 times is appropriately referred to as "11 (10) R time-saving big hit (99 times)" via the small hit, and the number of times of time saving control is 7 times. The small hit via 11 (10) R time reduction jackpot is appropriately called “small hit via 11 (10) R time reduction jackpot (7 times)”, and the number of times of time reduction control is 7 times via small hit 6 (5) R time reduction The big hit is appropriately called "6 (5) R time-saving big hit (7 times)" via a small hit, and the time-saving control number of times is 7 times. It is called R short time jackpot (7 times).

In this example, [for the second special symbol] in the small hit via big hit type determination table, 0 to 29 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are "11 (10) R time short jackpot via small hit ( 99 times)” (10%), 30 to 149 are assigned to “11 (10) R time short jackpot (7 times)” (40%), 150 to 164 Assigned to "6 (5) R time-saving big hit (7 times) via small hit" (5%), and 165 to 299 are assigned to "4 (3) R time-saving big hit (7 times)" via small hit (45%).

[Variation pattern judgment]
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine the variation pattern.

Here, variation pattern determination during a hyper rush mode (see FIG. 9-6), which will be described later, will be described. Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the [loss] variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "loss", and the variation display result "big hit" or A variation pattern determination table [for big win/minor win] is prepared in advance, which is used when a "small win" is decided in advance.

[For loss] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of "shortened fluctuation lost", the fluctuation pattern of "shortened normal reach lost", and the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortened fluctuation lost", the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment A predetermined random value within the range that can be taken is assigned as a judgment value.

[For jackpot/minor win] In the variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of "shortened normal reach jackpot/minor win" and the variation pattern of "ultra-shortened variable jackpot/minor win", the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern A predetermined random value within the range that can be taken is assigned as a judgment value.

In the present embodiment, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Since a big hit via a small hit is included, a common variation pattern is used when the display result is a "big hit" and when the display result is a "small hit". However, it is not limited to such a form, and different variation patterns may be used depending on whether the display result is a "big hit" or when the display result is a "minor win".

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns in which the final display result is "loss" (variation patterns of "shortening variation failure" and "ultra-shortening variation failure"), the reach state is not established and the final display result is "loss". Something is reported.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of "shortened variation lost" is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being "missed" (hereinafter referred to as a "combination for lost decorative symbols". For example, "245 , "143", etc.) is displayed (stopped display and fixed stop) to notify that the final display result is "missing". The variation time at this time is set to 2 seconds.

In addition, for the variation pattern of "ultra-shortened variation lost", a result effect is executed to display information related to the number of big hits and the total number of awarded balls, and the display result is "missed". The combination of small symbols corresponding to this (hereinafter referred to as "combination for losing small symbols". For example, "245", "143", etc.) is displayed (fixed and stopped), so that the final display result is " It is notified that it is "out of line". The variation time at this time is set to 1 second.

In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "loss", in the variation pattern of "shortened normal reach failure", after the reach state is established, a predetermined trigger (operation of push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) The fact that the final display result is "lost" is displayed by displaying a combination of decorative symbols for "losing" (for example, "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result being "losing". be. The variation time at this time is set to 10 seconds.

In this embodiment, as the "decorative pattern combination for losing", the "first decorative pattern combination for losing" in which the ready-to-win state is not established and the "second decorative design combination for losing" in which the ready-to-win state is established are set. be done. "Combination for first loss of decorative pattern" is displayed when it is a variation pattern of "shortening fluctuation loss" or "ultra-shortening fluctuation loss", and "second combination for decorative pattern loss" is "shortened normal reach loss" ” is displayed when the fluctuation pattern is

In this example, the "first combination of decorative patterns for losing" is a combination of decorative patterns in which the ready-to-win state is not established, and the types of decorative patterns (characters and number patterns (alphabetical patterns)) are all scattered. is a combination of However, in this example, the "first winning combination of decorative patterns" includes "135", which is a "special combination of decorative patterns", which will be described later, and "123", which is an "initial combination of decorative patterns", which will be described later. It is a combination of decoration patterns excepted.

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", in the variation pattern of "shortened normal reach big hit/small hit", after the reach state is established, a predetermined trigger (push button 31B operation, elapse of a predetermined period of time, etc.). It is appropriately referred to as "a combination of decorative patterns for a big hit", and the combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the display result being a "small hit" is appropriately referred to as a "combination of decorative patterns for a small hit".) is displayed. It is notified that the final display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". The variation time at this time is set to 15 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the "jackpot combination of decoration symbols" is a combination of common decoration symbols including numbers stop-displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. For example, it is "333" or "444". Further, the ``combination of decorative symbols for a small win'' means that the common decorative symbols including numbers stop-displayed in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R and the display result stop-displayed in the pattern display area 5C are ``small hits''. It is a combination with a decoration design corresponding to becoming. For example, "3V3" or "4V4".

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", the variation pattern of "ultra-shortened variable big hit/small hit" is related to the number of big hits and the total number of awarded balls. A result effect of displaying a result display showing information is executed, and a resurrection effect of displaying a shooting star in the result display is executed, and the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". By displaying (determining and stopping) the combination, it is notified that the final display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". The variation time at this time is set to 10 seconds.

FIG. 9-5 (A) (FIGS. 9-5 (A1) and (A2)) is a variation pattern determination table for the 1st to 99th rotations of time reduction in hyper rush mode, and FIG. 9-5 (B) ( FIGS. 9-5 (B1) and (B2)) are variation pattern determination tables in the 1st remaining hold rotation, the 2nd remaining hold rotation, the 3rd remaining hold rotation, and the 4th remaining hold rotation in the hyperrush mode.

<[Hyper Rush Mode Time Saving 1st to 99th Rotation] Fluctuation Pattern Judgment Table>
As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), in the [missing] variation pattern determination table for the 1st to 99th rotations of the time saving mode in the hyper rush mode, 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "shortening variation failure", and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "shortening normal reach failure".

As shown in Figure 9-5 (A2), in the hyper rush mode time-saving 1st to 99th rotations [for big hits/small hits] variation pattern determination table, the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997 Among them, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "shortened normal reach big hit/small hit".

<[For 1st to 4th revolutions in hyper rush mode remaining hold] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B1), in the [loss] variation pattern determination table for the 1st to 4th rotations of the remaining hold in the hyper rush mode, out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "ultrashortened variation deviation".

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B2), in the [big hit / small hit] variation pattern determination table for the 1st to 4th rotations of the remaining hold in the hyper rush mode, the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997 Among them, 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortened fluctuation big hit/small hit".

[Normal production mode]
Each production mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) when the production mode is [normal mode] will be described in detail.

In this embodiment, when the production mode is [normal mode], it is possible to control the production mode in a plurality of types. When the production mode is the [normal mode], the plurality of production modes are, for example, [sunny mode], [cloudy mode], [rainy mode], and the like.
In the following description, the [sunny mode] when the production mode is the [normal mode] will be referred to as the [normal mode (sunny mode)] or simply the [sunny mode] as appropriate. The same applies to [cloudy mode] and [rain mode].

When the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], the production control CPU 120 displays a "sunny background image" representing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains as the background image of the decoration pattern. will be

When the performance mode is controlled to [normal mode (cloudy mode)], a ``cloudy background image'' representing a cloudy landscape is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern by the performance control CPU 120.例文帳に追加

When the performance mode is controlled to ``normal mode (rain mode)'', a ``rainy background image'' representing a rainy landscape is displayed as a background image of the decoration pattern by a performance control CPU 120.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, one of the following methods is applied as a method of switching between various production modes ([sunny mode], [cloudy mode], [rain mode]) when the production mode is [normal mode]. be able to.
(A) Production mode change method at specified number of rotations (B) Production mode change method by player operation

(A) "Method of changing effect mode at specified number of revolutions" is a method of controlling to another effect mode when the variable display of specified number of revolutions is executed after being controlled to one effect mode.
For example, when the variable display is executed 30 times after the effect mode is controlled to [sunny mode], the effect mode is controlled to either [cloudy mode] or [rainy mode].

(B) ``Method of changing production mode by player operation'' means that when the player operates the operation unit at an arbitrary timing while being controlled in one production mode, it switches to another production mode. In a controlled way.
For example, when the effect mode is controlled to [sunny mode], the player operates the push button 31B or the like at the timing when the player wants to change the effect mode, thereby making the effect selected by the player. mode (either [cloudy mode] or [rain mode]).

[ Various production modes including [Normal mode (sunny mode)] if the production mode can be switched when the production mode is controlled to [Normal mode (sunny mode)] and then the production mode is controlled to [Normal mode] ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rain mode)]).

That is, in the present embodiment, the production mode to be controlled after the time saving exit is fixed to [normal mode (sunny mode)], after that, at a predetermined opportunity (for example, 20 times fluctuation display after the time saving exit ends) , It is possible to switch the production mode, and various production modes including [Normal mode (sunny mode)] ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rain mode)] ) can be switched from

[Decorative design, small design]
Each design for production (decorative design, small design) in this embodiment will be described in detail.

(decorative design)
In the present embodiment, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of kinds of decorations as decoration identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Variable display of the pattern is performed. The decorative patterns in this embodiment are composed of characters, numerical patterns representing numbers and the like, and alphabetic patterns representing alphabets and the like.

Decorative designs including characters and number designs include, for example, a decorative design including the character "A" and the number "1", a decorative design including the character "B" and the number "2", and a character "C" and the number " 3”, a decorative pattern including the character “D” and the number “4”, a decorative pattern including the character “E” and the number “5”, and a decoration including the character “F” and the number “6” It means a pattern or a decorative pattern including the character "G" and the number "7".

Also, the decoration pattern including the character and the alphabet pattern is, for example, the decoration pattern including the character "V" and the alphabet "V".

(small pattern)
In the present embodiment, a small pattern is a pattern smaller than the decoration pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 and indicates whether or not the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special pattern. called. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area 5r are displayed in the upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the small patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are variably displayed and stopped. The upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small symbols corresponding to the second special symbol are variably displayed and statically displayed, is also shared with the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

[Active display, Hold display, Hold memory count]
In this embodiment, the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a first pending display area 09TM01E for displaying the first pending storage number (0 to 4 first pending displays 09TM01). A second pending display area 09TM02E for displaying a second pending storage number (0 to 4 second pending displays 09TM02) is provided in the lower right portion of the screen of the device 5 . In addition, at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5, an active display 09TM03, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed and information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed, is displayed. An active display area 09TM03E is provided.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory number display area 09TM05E for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first reserved display area 09TM01E). A second reserved memory number display area 09TM06E for displaying the second reserved memory number is provided in the right portion (above the second reserved memory display area 09TM02E).

Here, in the first reserved display area 09TM01E, the number of objects (round images) corresponding to the number of first reserved memories are displayed, and in the second reserved display area 09TM02E, the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved memory count is displayed numerically in the first reserved memory count display area 09TM05E, and the second reserved memory count is displayed numerically in the second reserved memory count display region 09TM06E. The display range of the object in the first reserved display area 09TM01E is wider than the numerical display range in the first reserved storage number display area 09TM05E, and the first reserved storage number is displayed in the first reserved storage area 09TM01E. It is displayed with higher visibility than the number display area 09TM05E. In addition, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 09TM02E is wider than the numerical display range in the second reserved memory number display area 09TM06E, and the second reserved memory number is displayed in the second reserved display area 09TM02E. It is displayed with higher visibility than the reserved storage number display area 09TM06E.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to a normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the effect mode when the first flag, second flag, and third flag described later are not set is [Normal mode ], the game state is controlled to either a time saving state (low probability / high base state) or a normal state (low probability / low base state), and the effect when the first flag described later is set The mode is [challenge mode], and the game state is controlled to either a time-saving state (low probability / high base state) or a normal state (low probability / low base state), and a second flag described later is set The production mode when it is [rush mode], and the gaming state is controlled to either a time saving state (low probability / high base state) or normal state (low probability / low base state), and the second described later The effect mode when the 3 flag is set is the [hyper rush mode] (see FIG. 9-6).

In the example of the game flow shown in FIG. 9-6, a big hit occurs when the production mode is [normal mode], and after the end of the big hit game state, it is controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state), [challenge Mode] (1 time reduction + 4 suspension rotations) or [Hyper rush mode] (99 rotations + 4 suspension rotations), and when a big hit occurs, [Rush mode] (7 rotations + 4 suspension rotations) or It shifts to [Hyper Rush Mode] (time reduction 99 rotations + hold 4 rotations), and when a big hit does not occur, it shifts to [Normal Mode].

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via a small hit" is set by the V judgment winning device 87 one set number of times (0.1 seconds x 10 times, total 1 Round equivalent period), it is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 3 times (3R) under the condition of V winning within the number of times of the set, and the prize winning device is opened for 4 rounds, but it is practically The number of openings of the big winning opening is 3, and the player recognizes the opening of the big winning opening as a jackpot type similar to the pattern 3R time-saving jackpot. In addition, "6 (5) R short-time jackpot via small hit" is the number of times of one set after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened for one set (0.1 seconds x 10 times and a period equivalent to a total of one round) It is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 5 times (5R) on the condition of V winning within the game, and the prize winning device is opened for 6 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is substantially 5 times, and the game is played. The person recognizes the opening of the big winning opening as a big hit type similar to the big hit equivalent to the symbol 5R short-time big hit. In addition, "11 (10) R short-time jackpot via small hit" is the number of times of one set after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened for one set (0.1 seconds x 10 times and a period equivalent to a total of one round). It is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R) under the condition of V winning within the game, and the prize winning device is opened for 11 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is substantially 10 times, and the game is played. The person recognizes the opening of the big winning opening as a big hit type similar to the pattern 10R time-saving big hit.

Usually, the player recognizes the jackpot type based on the actual number of times the jackpot is opened (for example, the number of long openings of up to 29 seconds). ” and “4 (3) R short-time jackpot via small hit” are called “3R short-time jackpot”, and “10R short-time jackpot” and “11 (10) R short-time jackpot via small hit” are called “10R It is called a short-time jackpot. In addition, the jackpot type "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is referred to as "5R time-saving jackpot".

(1) When the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag, which will be described later, are not set, the effect mode is set. [Normal mode]. (1A) As an example of an effect when the effect mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)], a sunny background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image of a decorative pattern, and (1B) the effect mode is [normal mode (cloudy mode)], the cloudy background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative pattern, and (1C) the production mode is [normal mode (rain mode)]. As an example of the effect in this case, a rain background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

(2) In the state of (1) described above, when a variable display is executed in which the display result is "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state. In this embodiment, there are "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" as the first special symbol jackpot types, and (2A) as an example of production when the jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", The characters "FEVER" indicating the 3R big win are displayed on the image display device 5, and (2B) the 10R big win is shown as an example of the effect when the big win type is the "symbol 10R time-saving big win". The characters “MAX FEVER” to be notified are displayed on the image display device 5 .

(3) When the above-mentioned (2A) jackpot type is the "symbol 3R time saving jackpot", when the jackpot ends, the effect control CPU 120 sets the (3A-I) first flag, and the game state changes to the time saving state ( (3A-II) When the first flag is set and the game state is changed to the normal state (low probability/low base state) Under control, when the suspension memory (variable display with execution suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at (3A-I) is executed, the production mode is changed to [ Challenge mode]. As an example of an effect when the effect mode is the [challenge mode], the characters "Rush Challenge" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the effect mode will shift to the [challenge mode].

In the state of (3), all the display results are "missed", one variable display in the time saving state, and the suspension memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) When (1) and (1) are executed, the state (1) is established. In this example, when the state (3) is controlled to the state (1), the state (1A) (the effect mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]) is controlled.

Also, in the state of (3), a small hit puncture described later occurs, and when the remaining time reduction control frequency at this time is 0 times, it is controlled to the state of (1). In this example, when the state (3) is controlled to the state (1), the state (1A) (the effect mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]) is controlled.

(4) When the jackpot ends when the (6A) jackpot type described later is "3R short-time jackpot" or "5R short-time jackpot", or "10R" among the jackpot types (6C) "10R short-time jackpot" described later When the jackpot in the case of "time saving jackpot (7 times)" is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sets the (4A-I) second flag, and the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state). Then, when the variable display is executed 7 times, (4A-II) the second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy / low base state), and (4A-I) The production mode is set to [Rush mode] when the pending memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at that time is executed. As an example of an effect when the effect mode is the [rush mode], the characters "Battle Rush" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the effect mode will shift to the [rush mode].

In the state of (4), all the display results are "missed", 7 variable displays in the time saving state, and suspension memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) When (1) and (1) are executed, the state (1) is established. In this example, when the state (4) is controlled to the state (1), the state (1A) (the effect mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]) is controlled.

Also, in the state of (4), when a small hit puncture occurs and the number of remaining time reduction control at this time is 0 times, it is controlled to the state of (1). In this example, when the state (4) is controlled to the state (1), the state (1A) (the effect mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]) is controlled.

(5) When the above-mentioned (2B) jackpot type is "symbol 10R short-time jackpot" ends, or (6C) "10R short-time jackpot" (99 times )”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the (5B-I) third flag, controls the game state to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and 99 times ( 1st to 99th rotation) when the variable display is executed, (5B-II) the third flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), (5B -I) The performance mode is [Hyper Rush Mode] when the pending memory (variable display in which the execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at the time of is executed. . As an example of an effect when the effect mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], a telop display including the characters "HYPER" and the characters "Battle Rush" that informs that the effect mode will shift to [Hyper Rush Mode] is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the display device 5 .

In the state of (5), all the display results are "missed", 99 variable display in the time saving state, and the pending memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) When (1) and (1) are executed, the state (1) is established. However, in the variable display of the second special symbol, in this embodiment in which a small hit occurs with a probability of about 1/7, the state of (5) in which the number of times of time reduction control is 99 times is the variable display of the second special symbol. When is executed, it can be said that the next big hit via the small win is virtually confirmed, so the example of being controlled from the state of (5) to the state of (1) is not shown. .

Also, in the state of (5), if a small hit puncture occurs, it is controlled to the state of (1) regardless of the number of remaining time saving control at this time (see FIG. 9-8 (B)). In this example, when the state of (5) is controlled to the state of (1), the state of (1A) (the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]) is controlled.

(6) When the presentation mode is [Challenge mode] (see (3)), When the presentation mode is [Rush mode] (See (4)), or When the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush mode] (See (5)), when the display result becomes "big win" or "minor win" in any of the variable displays, the game is controlled to the big win game state (including the big win game state via the small win). In this embodiment, there is a "symbol 10R time-saving big hit" as the big hit type of the second special symbol when the display result is a "big hit", and the second special symbol when the display result is a "small hit". As types of big wins via small wins, there are ``4 (3) R short time big wins via small wins'', ``6 (5) R short time big wins via small wins'', and ``11 (10) R short time big wins via small wins''.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, (6A) as an example of an effect when the jackpot type is a "3R time-saving jackpot", the characters "FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the jackpot is actually a 3R jackpot. (6B) As an example of an effect when the jackpot type is a “5R time-saving jackpot”, the characters “BIG FEVER” are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the jackpot is substantially a 5R jackpot. (6C) As an example of the effect when the jackpot type is the "10R time-saving jackpot", the characters "MAX FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the jackpot is substantially the 10R jackpot. At this time, among the jackpot types of "10R time-saving big hit", "10R time-saving big hit (99 times)" with 99 times of time-saving control and "10R time-saving big hit (7 times)" with 7 times of time-saving control and are set.

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, second flag, and third flag in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a time chart showing game state control timings associated with the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag.

It is assumed that when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), a big win having a ``symbol 3R short time big win'' occurs and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. After the end of the big hit game state, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first flag (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-7). At this time, the production control CPU 120 sets the production mode to [challenge mode].

After the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low accuracy/high base state) and the display result is "missing", when the first fluctuation display ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state). (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-7). Suspended memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period of T1 to T2 (the first variable display period of the rush challenge) shown in FIG. is executed, and in any of the variable displays based on the pending memory (maximum 4 in this example) of the period, the jackpot type is "4 (3) R short-time jackpot via small hit" or In the case of "6 (5) R time-saving big hit via small hit", when the variation display ends, it is controlled to the big hit game state (big hit game state via small hit) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-7). . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the [challenge mode].

When the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low probability/high base state), and the effect control CPU 120 erases the first flag and sets the second flag (see FIG. 9-7 Timing of T4 shown). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to [rush mode].

After the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low accuracy/high base state) and the display result is "missing" 7 times of fluctuation display ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 9-7). Suspended memory (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period of T4 to T5 (the 1st to 7th variable display period of the battle rush) shown in Figure 9-7 variable display) is executed, and in any of the variable displays based on the pending memory (maximum 4 in this example) of the period, the jackpot type is "symbol 10R short time jackpot" or "small hit Via 11 (10) R time-saving big hit (99 times)", when the variation display is completed, it is controlled to the big hit game state (big hit game state via the small hit) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-7 ). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the [rush mode].

When the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the effect control CPU 120 erases the second flag and sets the third flag (see FIG. 9-7 timing of T7 shown). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to [hyper rush mode].

After the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low accuracy/high base state), the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) after 99 times of fluctuation display where the display result is "missing". (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-7). Suspended memory (execution suspended (maximum 4 in this example) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period of T7 to T8 (1st to 99th variable display period of Hyper Battle Rush) shown in Figure 9-7 variable display) is executed, and if the display result is "missing" in all the variable displays based on the pending memory (maximum 4 in this example) of the period, that variable display is completed, the effect control CPU 120 clears the third flag (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 9-7). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the [hyper battle rush] and shifts to the [normal mode] effect mode.

[Erase Timing of First and Second Flags]
In this embodiment, any one of the following timings (1) to (3) is set as the erasing timing of the first flag and the second flag. Note that the timings shown in (1) to (3) are merely examples of erasing timings of the first flag and the second flag, and are not limited to such forms. Other timings different from the timings shown in (1) to (3) may be set as the erasing timings of the first flag and the second flag.

(1) The first flag and the second flag are the prescribed time-saving control times (1 time, 7 time) is not controlled to the big win game state in response to the variable display (that is, when the display result is "lost" or the display result is "minor win" but a small win puncture occurs) 2, when the number of pending memories (variable displays where execution is suspended (maximum 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period controlled in the time saving state is 0, time saving to be described later If the display result of the final variation display is "miss", it will be erased at the timing when this time-saving final variation display ends, and if the display result of the time-saving final variation display is "small hit", it will be described later in the small winning game state. A small hit puncture occurs, and it is erased at the timing when the small win game state ends.

(2) The first flag and the second flag are the state in which these flags are set, and the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state) and then the prescribed time saving control times (1 time, 7 time) is not controlled to the big win game state in response to the variable display (that is, when the display result is "lost" or the display result is "minor win" but a small win puncture occurs) and when the number of pending memories corresponding to the starting prizes generated during the time-saving state control period is one or more, based on the pending memory corresponding to the starting prize-winnings occurring during the time-saving state control period. If not controlled to the big hit gaming state in response to all the variable displays (that is, if the display result is "miss" or if the display result is "small hit" but a small hit blowout occurs), When the display result of the variable display based on the last reserved memory is "loss", it is erased at the timing when the variable display is finished, and when the display result of the variable display based on the last reserved memory is "minor hit", A small winning puncture occurs in the small winning game state, and is erased at the timing when the small winning game state ends.

(3) The first flag and the second flag are erased at the timing when the jackpot game state is completed when the jackpot game state is controlled while these flags are set.

[Erase timing of the third flag]
In this embodiment, the erasing timing of the third flag can be set to any one of timings (1) to (4) below. Note that the timings shown in (1) to (4) are merely examples of the erasing timings of the third flag, and are not limited to such forms. Timings different from the timings shown in (1) to (4) may be set as the erasing timings of the third flag.

(1) The third flag is a state in which this flag is set, and the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state). If the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the number of pending memories corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period controlled in the time saving state is 0, at the timing when the time saving final variable display ends erased.

(2) The third flag is a state in which this flag is set, and the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state). When the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the number of pending memories corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period of being controlled to the time saving state is 1 or more, it is controlled to the time saving state When the display results of all the variable displays based on the reserved memory corresponding to the starting prize generated during the period are "missing", the variable display based on the last reserved memory is erased at the timing when the variable display ends.

(3) The third flag is a state where this flag is set, and the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state), and then the specified time saving control number of times (99 times) is displayed. The display result of any one of the variable display based on the reserved memory when the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period of state control is one or more, and the display result of any one of the variable displays is "small hit". In some cases, a small hit puncture occurs in the small hit game state, and it is erased at the timing when the small hit game state ends (see FIG. 9-8 (B)).

(4) The third flag is erased at the timing when the jackpot game state is completed when the jackpot game state is controlled while this flag is set.

[small hit punk]
In this embodiment, when a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball enters the V prize winning area 870 and is operated by the V winning prize switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. is detected, the condition for generating a big win is established, and the game is controlled to a big win game state. Winning of a game ball to such a V winning area 870 is called V winning. However, when a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball does not enter the V prize winning region 870 and the game ball is not detected by the V winning prize switch 87a during the predetermined effective period. Then, the conditions for generating a big win are not satisfied, and the game state is not controlled to a big win game state. In this way, when the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 during the small winning game and the small winning game ends before the V winning occurs, this case is called "small winning blowout".

As shown in the description of FIG. 8-1, when the small hit puncture occurs (when the V winning does not occur) after the end of the small hit game state When the remaining time reduction control count is 1 or more, continuation Then, it is controlled to the time saving state, and when the number of times of remaining time saving control is 0 after the end of the small winning game state when the small winning puncture occurs, it is controlled to the normal state. In the following description, the case where the number of times of remaining time reduction control is one or more after the end of the small winning game state when a small winning puncture occurs will be explained.

In the present embodiment, the game state to be controlled after the end of the small winning game state in which the small winning blowout occurred can be changed depending on the type of the time saving state immediately before being controlled to the small winning gaming state in which the small winning blowout occurred. It is possible.

In this example, (A) when the second flag is set (that is, when the production mode is [rush mode]), a small hit occurs when it is controlled in the time saving state, and this small hit When a small winning puncture occurs in the game state, when the number of times of remaining time saving control is one or more, control is continued to the time saving state after the small winning game state is finished. On the other hand, (B) when the third flag is set (that is, when the production mode is [hyper rush mode]), a small hit occurs when the time saving state is controlled, and this small hit is generated. When a small winning puncture occurs in the game state, even if the number of times of remaining time reduction control is one or more, the game is controlled to the normal state after the small winning game state ends.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-6, if the first flag is set (that is, if the production mode is [challenge mode]), the number of time reduction control is one time , After the end of the small winning game state in which the small winning puncture occurred, the number of remaining time saving control times is 0 times, and the game state is not controlled to the time saving state but is controlled to the normal state. Not limited to this form, when the first flag is set (that is, when the production mode is [challenge mode]), by adopting a configuration in which the number of times of time reduction control is two or more times, a small hit puncture When the number of times of remaining time-saving control is one or more after the generated small winning game state is ended, the time-saving state may be continuously controlled after the small winning game is ended.

FIG. 9-8 is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state according to the type of time-saving state when a small hit puncture occurs. In FIG. 9-8 (A), when the second flag is set (that is, when the production mode is [rush mode]), a small hit occurs in a small game that occurs when the time saving state is controlled. It is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state when puncture occurs. FIG. 9-8 (B) shows that when the third flag is set (that is, when the production mode is [hyper rush mode]), a small hit game occurs when the time saving state is controlled. It is a time chart showing the control timing of the gaming state when a hit puncture occurs. In the following description, the case where the number of times of remaining time reduction control is one or more after the end of the small winning game state when a small winning puncture occurs will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), when the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state) (based on the fact that the second flag is set, the production mode is [Rush Mode]), in any of the variable displays, a variable display in which the display result is a "small hit" is executed, and when a small win occurs, when the variable display ends, It is controlled to a small hit game state (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-8 (A)). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the [rush mode].

When the small winning game state ends without winning a V prize, that is, when a small winning puncture occurs, the CPU 103 continues the game state and controls it to a time saving state (low probability/high base state), and the effect control CPU 120 2 flag is continuously set without being cleared (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-8 (2)). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to [rush mode] based on the fact that the second flag is set (not erased).

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), when the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state) (based on the fact that the third flag is set, the production mode is [hyper Rush mode]), in any of the variable displays, a variable display in which the display result is a "small hit" is executed, and when a small win occurs, when the variable display ends , It is controlled to the small hit game state (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-8 (B)). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the [hyper rush mode].

When the small winning game state ends without winning V, that is, when a small winning puncture occurs, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the effect control CPU 120 erases the third flag. (Timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-8(B)). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to [normal mode] based on the fact that the third flag is erased and none of the first to third flags are set.

In this embodiment, a small hit corresponding to a small hit that occurs in a state where the production mode is either [challenge mode] or [rush mode] (state in which either the first flag or the second flag is set) In the winning game, when a small hit puncture occurs, (A) if the number of remaining time reduction controls after the end of the small winning game state is 1 or more, the production mode displays the fluctuation of the remaining time reduction control number. Until it is executed, the production mode ([challenge mode], [rush mode]) that was controlled before the small hit game is controlled again, and (B) the remaining time reduction control number after the end of the small hit game state is 0 If it is the time, the production mode is controlled to [Normal mode].

For example, when the production mode is [Rush mode], a small hit occurs in the seventh variable display (state where there are four variable displays whose execution is suspended at this time) under control in the time saving state. When a puncture occurs, the second special pattern whose execution is suspended is displayed four times while the performance mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)] after the end of the small win.

At this time, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols for the big hit corresponding to the small winning combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the variable display when the previous small win occurred. A combination is displayed (see FIGS. 9-16), and small pattern variable display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for four times whose execution is suspended is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a small hit game corresponding to a small hit that occurred in a state where the production mode is [hyper rush mode] (a state in which the third flag is set), when a small hit puncture occurs , (C) When the number of times of remaining time reduction control after the end of the small hit game state is any number, the production mode is controlled to [normal mode].

For example, when the production mode is [Hyper rush mode], the small hit that occurred in the tenth variable display (the state where there are four variable displays whose execution is suspended at this time) under control in the time saving state When a hit puncture occurs, after the end of the small win, in a state where the performance mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], four times of variable display of the second special symbol whose execution is suspended is executed. .

At this time, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols for the big hit corresponding to the small winning combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the variable display when the previous small win occurred. A combination is displayed (see FIGS. 9-16), and small pattern variable display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for four times whose execution is suspended is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. executed.

[Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result (big hit, small hit, or loss, jackpot type in the case of a big hit, jackpot type in the case of a big hit via a small hit) Based on the reception of a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command that designates the fluctuation time and effect content (reach, pseudo-run, etc.) of the special symbol. , It is possible to specify that the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the special symbol variation time and the contents of the effect (reach, pseudo-run, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 9-9 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-9 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-9.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any one of the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag is set (step S09TM1010).

If none of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (NO in step S09TM1010), effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S09TM1020 and subsequent steps. If none of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (NO in step S09TM1010), it means that the effect mode is controlled to [normal mode], so step The processing after S09TM1020 is processing executed when the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode].

If any of the first flag, the second flag, or the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM1010), effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S09TM1060 and subsequent steps. If any of the first flag, the second flag, or the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM1010, the production mode is [Challenge mode], [Rush mode], or [Hyper Rush mode ], the processing after step S09TM1060 is performed when the effect mode is controlled to any one of [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode]. It is the process to be executed.

When neither the first flag, the second flag, nor the third flag is set (NO in step S09TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result specified by the display result specifying command (to be executed from now on). It is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" (step S09TM1020).

If the display result is a "big hit" (YES in step S09TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 selects the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display according to the [first special symbol] decorative symbols described later. It is determined based on the jackpot combination determination table (see FIG. 9-10(A)) (step S09TM1030).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute a symbol stop motion effect described later and a symbol stop sound effect described later (see FIGS. 9-11) (step S09TM1040), and the process ends as it is.

Further, when the display result is "lost" (NO in step S09TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 selects the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display for losing the decorative symbol combination determination table (non shown) (step S09TM1050), and the process ends.

The "decorative pattern combination for losing" in the present embodiment includes a decorative pattern combination for a big hit (in this example, "333", etc.), a decorative pattern for a small hit combination (in this example, "3V3", etc.), And, it is a combination of decorative designs different from any special combination of decorative designs ("135" in this example) to be described later.

If any of the first flag, the second flag, or the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result specified by the display result specifying command (to be executed from now on). It is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display) is either a "big win" or a "minor win" (step S09TM1060).

If the display result is either a "big win" or a "minor win" (YES in step S09TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, which will be described later. 2 special design] decorative design jackpot combination determination table (see Figure 9-10 (B1)), or [second special design] decorative design jackpot (small hit) combination determination table described later (Figure 9-10 (B2)) (step S09TM1070).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect (see FIG. 9-11) (step S09TM1080), and ends the process as it is.

Further, when the display result is "lost" (NO in step S09TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display in the decorative design combination determination table ( (not shown) (step S09TM1090), and the process ends.

<Decorative pattern combination decision table>
9-10 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the decorative symbol combination determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-10, in this embodiment, judgment values are assigned so that the determination ratio of the combination of decorative symbols differs according to the display result and the jackpot type corresponding to the display result. .

([For 1st special symbol] Decorative symbol jackpot combination decision table)
In FIG. 9-10 (A), the display result corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol designated by the display result designation command is "big hit", and the big hit type corresponding to this "big hit" is "symbol 3R time saving It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a decorative symbol jackpot combination determination table in the case of either "jackpot" or "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot".

When the jackpot type is ``symbol 3R time-saving jackpot'', the combination for the jackpot of the decorative pattern is determined to be ``111'' at a rate of 15%, similarly, ``222'' at a rate of 20%, and ``222'' at a rate of 10%. , "444" at a rate of 20%, "555" at a rate of 15%, and "666" at a rate of 20%.

When the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", the combination of decorative patterns for jackpot is determined to be "777" at a rate of 100%.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot combination of decorative symbols "111" to "666" is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is the "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot". , when the jackpot combination of decorative symbols "777" is stop-displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot". Therefore, when the jackpot combination of decorative symbols "777" is stop-displayed, the player can recognize that the "hyper rush mode" is controlled after the jackpot game.

([Second special symbol] Decorative symbol jackpot combination decision table)
In FIG. 9-10 (B1), the display result corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol specified by the display result specification command is "big hit", and the big hit type corresponding to this "big hit" is "symbol 10R time saving It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a decorative symbol jackpot combination determination table in the case of "jackpot".

When the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", the combination of decorative patterns for jackpot is determined to be "777" at a rate of 100%.

([Second special symbol] Decorative symbol for big hit (small hit) combination decision table)
In FIG. 9-10 (B2), the display result corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol designated by the display result designation command is "small hit", and the big hit type corresponding to this "small hit" is "small hit". For the big hit of the decorative pattern in the case of either 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via the hit, 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via the small hit, or 4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via the small hit It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a combination determination table (for small hits).

When the jackpot type is "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via a small hit", the combination of decorative patterns for the jackpot is set to "111" and the combination of decorative patterns for the small hit is determined to be "1V1" at a rate of 10%. Similarly, "222" and "2V2" at a rate of 10%, "333" and "3V3" at a rate of 10%, "444" and "4V4" at a rate of 10%, " 555" and "5V5", "666" and "6V6" at a rate of 10%, and "777" and "7V7" at a rate of 40%.

When the jackpot type is "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via a small hit", the combination of decorative patterns for the jackpot is determined to be "111" and the combination of decorative patterns for the small hit is determined to be "1V1" at a rate of 15%. Similarly, "222" and "2V2" at a rate of 20%, "333" and "3V3" at a rate of 10%, "444" and "4V4" at a rate of 20%, " 555" and "5V5", and 20% to "666" and "6V6".

When the jackpot type is "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via a small hit", the combination of decorative patterns for the jackpot is determined to be "111" and the combination of decorative patterns for the small hit is determined to be "1V1" at a rate of 15%. and similarly, "222" and "2V2" at a rate of 20%, "333" and "3V3" at a rate of 10%, "444" and "4V4" at a rate of 20%, and "555" at a rate of 15%. and "5V5" are determined to be "666" and "6V6" at a rate of 20%.

In this embodiment, when determining a combination for a big hit (for a small win) of decorative symbols, a "big hit combination of decorative patterns" is determined, and a "decorative pattern corresponding to this "big hit combination of decorative patterns" is determined. 's small hit combination" is determined. That is, "a combination of decorative symbols for a big win" and "a combination of decorative symbols for a small win" are determined at the same time.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the "decorative symbol combination for the big win" and the "decorative symbol combination for the small win" are determined in advance in the common processing (step S09TM1070) at the timing of the start of variation, the small winning In an irregular situation such as when a hit blowout occurs, a predetermined combination of decorative patterns (“a combination of decorative patterns for a big win” and a “combination of decorative patterns for a small win”) should be displayed. It suffices to display at the timing of , and the processing load of the effect control can be reduced.

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which the "decorative pattern jackpot combination" and "decorative pattern small-hit combination" are determined at the same time, and the "decorative pattern jackpot combination" and "decorative pattern small-hit combination" are determined separately. may decide. For example, after determining the "big hit combination of decorative patterns", a configuration may be adopted in which the "small winning combination of decorative patterns" is determined, and after the "small winning combination of decorative patterns" is determined, the "decorative patterns" You may adopt the structure which determines "the combination for big hits."

[Design stop motion effect, pattern stop sound effect]
In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit" or a "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display result is a "big hit" or a "big hit" at the timing when the decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute a symbol stop motion effect and a symbol stop sound effect for notifying that a "small hit" will be achieved.

The symbol stop action effect is an effect executed when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big win" or a "minor win", and is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. , At the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern (in this example, character and number pattern or alphabetic pattern) performs an action (in this example, enlargement, action). At the timing when the decoration pattern should be fixed and stopped (the timing when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, etc.), the design stop operation production is finished, and the action of the decoration pattern is also finished. In the pattern stop action performance, the action of the decorative pattern makes it possible to notify that the display result of the variable display being executed will be a ``big hit'' or a ``minor win'' and to improve the amusement of the game.

The symbol stop sound effect is an effect that is executed when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big win" or a "minor win", and is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. , at the timing when the decoration pattern should be stopped and displayed, the design stop effect sound is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the timing when the decoration pattern should be fixed and stopped (the timing of receiving the pattern fixing designation command, etc.), the design stop sound performance is finished, and the reproduction output of the pattern stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is also finished. In the symbol stop sound production, the speaker 8L, 8R reproduces and outputs the symbol stop effect sound, thereby notifying that the display result of the variable display being executed will be a "big win" or "minor win", as well as the performance of the game. Interest can be improved.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display being executed is "loss", neither the symbol stop motion effect nor the symbol stop sound effect is executed. At the timing when the decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed, the decorative patterns (in this example, characters, numeric patterns, and alphabetic patterns) do not perform actions (enlargement, movement), and a pattern stop effect sound is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As a result, it is possible to notify that the display result of the variable display being executed is "loss" and to prevent careless feeling of disappointment in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit" or a "minor win", the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. At a timing different from the timing to be played, neither the symbol stop motion effect nor the symbol stop sound effect is executed.

For example, a decoration pattern corresponding to the fact that the display result of the variable display executed immediately before the big win game is "big win" or "minor win" is displayed during the period until the first variable display after the big win game is executed. Neither the symbol stop motion effect nor the symbol stop sound effect is executed at the timing at which it should be displayed.

[Example of pattern stop motion effect, pattern stop sound effect]
9-11 are explanatory diagrams showing effect images displayed on the image display device 5 and effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, which are related to the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect. FIGS. 9-11 (1), (2A) and (3A) show the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the reproduction output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect are not executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a sound effect to be played; FIGS. 9-11 (1), (2B) and (3B) show the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R when the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect are executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a production sound to be output;

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "C" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the ready-to-reach state should be established in the variation pattern. A ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying a decoration pattern including the number "3". At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decoration pattern is stopped, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 09TM31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Here, the operation prompting display 09TM31B is displayed with a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher than the panel image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 09TM03E to display the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number display area 09TM05E, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number display area 09TM06E.

<Example of production when symbol stop motion production and symbol stop sound production are not executed>
Next, when it is decided not to execute the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. operation, the timing at which the decorative symbols in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 displays the combination for the decorative symbols in which the display result is "lost" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (this example Then, "323") is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3A), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, which receives the symbol confirmation designation command, receives the final decorative symbol. The combination ("323" in this example) is fixed and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("323" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

<Example of effect when symbol stop motion effect and symbol stop sound effect are executed>
Next, when it is decided to execute the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. Operation, the timing at which the decoration pattern in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 executes the symbol stop operation effect, and the display result becomes "big hit" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The combination for the big hit of the symbols is caused to perform an action (in this example, enlargement and movement of the decorative symbols including the character "C" and the number "3"), the symbol stop sound production is executed, and the symbol stop effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Play back the sound. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3B), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command terminates the symbol stop operation effect, In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the actions of the decorative symbols are terminated, the final combination of the decorative symbols for the jackpot ("333" in this example) is determined and stopped, the symbol stop sound effect is terminated, and the speaker is activated. From 8L and 8R, the reproduction output of the symbol stop effect sound is terminated. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("333" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

[Production decision processing during small hit]
FIG. 9-12 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed during a small hit. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process during the small hit shown in FIGS. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the small hit start designation command, the effect to be executed during the small hit (and the effect not to be executed) is determined by the effect determination process during the small hit shown in FIGS. 9-12. .

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not either the first promotion effect described later or the second promotion effect described later is being executed (step S09TM2010). If either the first promotion effect or the second promotion effect is being executed (YES in step S09TM2010), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If neither the first promotion effect nor the second promotion effect is being executed (NO in step S09TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a power interruption recovery flag, which will be described later, is set (step S09TM2020).

The "power outage recovery flag" in the present embodiment means that the production control CPU 120 outputs a production control command (in this example, a power failure recovery designation command, etc.) that instructs recovery from the power outage shown in FIG. 3 (step S7). A kind of flag that is set when it is received. If the timing at which this "power failure recovery flag" is set is (1) the timing at which the variable display of the special symbol is executed, it is erased at the timing at which the variable display is completed, and (2) the special If the timing is any one of the timing when the variable display of the pattern is not executed, the timing during the big winning, or the timing during the small winning, it is erased at the timing when the next variable display is started.

When the power failure recovery flag is not set (NO in step S09TM2020), effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first promotion effect (step S09TM2030), and ends the process as it is.

When the power failure recovery flag is set (YES in step S09TM2020), effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the second promotion effect (step S09TM2040), and ends the process.

[Promoting effect]
In the present embodiment, during a small winning game, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an promotion effect of instructing to hit to the right in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870). The promotional effects include a promotional flashing effect to promote right-handed hitting to win a V prize by flashing (light emitting) the V judgment winning device LED 87L, and a promotional effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R to win a V prize. and a promotion image production promoting right-handed hitting for winning a V prize by displaying a promotional image on the image display device 5. .

In this embodiment, a first promotion effect and a second promotion effect can be executed as promotion effects. The first promotion effect and the second promotion effect are different in execution/non-execution of each effect and effect modes. FIG. 9-13 is an explanatory diagram of an effect mode table of the promotion effect showing an example of the effect mode of the promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-13, the first promotion effect is a effect executed during a small winning game, and among the promotion flashing effects, the first promotion flashing effect, the promotion sound effect production, and the promotion image production It is an effect including the first promotion image effect among the above.

The first accelerated flashing effect is a effect of flashing (emitting) the V-judgment winning device LED 87L in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds. Further, the promoting sound effect production is a production of reproducing and outputting the promoting sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. The first promotional image effect is a production for causing the image display device 5 to display the first promotional image. This first promotion image is controlled to a small winning game state with a first arrow image in the center of the screen instructing to hit right in order to win a V, characters of "Aim for V" in the lower left part of the screen. and an updatable time gauge image showing the remaining period of time. The first arrow image is a rainbow-colored (seven-color) image, and is a moving image for performing an animation operation (see FIGS. 9-14). The characters "Aim for the V" are also displayed in rainbow colors (seven colors) (see FIG. 9-14).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-13, the second promotion effect is a effect executed during the small winning game, and includes the second promotion flashing effect of the promotion flashing effect and the second promotion flashing effect of the promotion image effect. It is an effect including a promotion image effect.

The second accelerated flashing effect is a effect of causing the V-judgment winning device LED 87L to flash (light up) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds. Also, the second promotional image effect is a production for causing the image display device 5 to display the second promotional image. This second promotion image is an image that includes a second arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs to hit right to win the V prize, and the characters "Please put the ball in the V" in the lower center of the screen. be. The second arrow image is a white (single color) image, and is a static image that does not perform animation (see FIGS. 9-15). In addition, the characters "Please put the ball in the V" are displayed in a black (single color) image (see FIG. 9-15).

[Production example of the first promotion production]
FIG. 9-14 shows the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the effect light emitted from the V judgment winning device LED 87L, and the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, which are related to the first promotion effect. and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (1), when it is determined to execute the first promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first promotion effect (in this example, the first promotion flashing effect, promotional sound effect production, first promotional image production) is executed, the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L flashes (lights up) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds, and promotional sound effects are emitted from speakers 8L and 8R. is reproduced and output, and the image display device 5 displays the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T).

At this time, the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L is not emitting light because it is the timing to turn off the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L in the flashing period (0.5 seconds) of the first promotion flashing effect. Also, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of the animation action (the first arrow image displayed only in the center left portion of the screen) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the first promotion effect (in this example, the first promotion flashing effect, the promotion sound effect effect, and the first promotion image effect). The V judgment winning device LED 87L flashes (lights up) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds, the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output promotional sound effects, and the image display device 5 displays the first Display a promotional image.

At this time, the flashing period (0.5 seconds) of the first accelerated flashing effect is the timing at which the V-judgment winning device LED 87L should emit light, so the V-judgment winning device LED 87L emits rainbow color. Also, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of the animation action (the first arrow image displayed in the entire central portion of the screen) is displayed.

[Production example of the second promotion production]
FIG. 9-15 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect light emitted from the V judgment winning device LED 87L, which is related to the second promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), when it is determined to execute the second promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second promotion effect (in this example, the second promotion flashing effect, second promotion image effect) is executed, the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays the second promotion image (second arrow image 09TM12A, Display the characters "Please put a ball in V").

At this time, the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L is not emitting light because it is the timing to turn off the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L in the flashing cycle (2 seconds) of the first promotion flashing effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the second promotion effect (in this example, the second promotion flashing effect, the second promotion image effect), and the V judgment is made. The winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds, and the image display device 5 is caused to display the second promotion image.

At this time, the V judgment winning device LED 87L is emitting red light because it is the timing to light up the V judgment winning device LED 87L in the flashing period (2 seconds) of the second promotion flashing effect. At this time, the second promotion image continues to be displayed in the same display manner as in FIG. 9-15(1).

Thus, in the present embodiment in which a big hit is generated by entering (V winning) the game ball into the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state, the first promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the V judgment prize winning device 87 and instruct to aim at the V judgment prize winning device 87 (to hit right) in order to ensure V prize winning (winning to the V prize area 870).

In addition, by executing the second promotion performance in a performance mode different from the first promotion performance, a situation different from the normal small winning game (for example, power failure occurred during the small winning game state and the power supply was restored) A player is notified of a situation such as a situation in which V winning has not occurred in spite of the fact that the remaining control period of the later small winning game state is shortened, etc., and a performance with higher urgency than the first promotion performance. In a mode (for example, the first promotional effect is a performance mode for livening up the game, while the second promotional effect is a simple performance mode for notifying the player of what to do), V winning (V winning area) 870), the player can be instructed to aim at the V-judgment winning device 87 (to hit right).

[Production decision processing at the end of small hit]
FIG. 9-16 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process that is executed at the end of the small hit. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the end of the small hit shown in FIGS. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the small win end designation command, the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) after the end of the small win is determined by the effect determination process at the end of the small win shown in FIG. 9-16. do.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a V winning designation command is received (step S09TM3010). That is, it is determined whether or not a V prize has occurred during the small winning game.

When the V winning designation command is received (YES in step S09TM3010), that is, when the V winning has occurred in the small winning game, the effect control CPU 120 ends the big winning game corresponding to the small winning. It is decided to display a small winning combination of decoration symbols as a combination of decoration symbols to be displayed later (step S09TM3020), and the process is finished as it is.

The "combination for the small win of decorative symbols" determined to be displayed after the big win via the small win in step S09TM3020 is either controlled after the big win game corresponding to the small win (short-time big win via the small win) is completed. ([Rush mode], [Hyper Rush mode] in this example).

For example, in the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning game state, a small winning combination of decorative symbols (for example, "3V3" etc.) corresponding to the display result becoming "small winning" , Displayed (stopped display, fixed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and controlled after the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot (in this example, [ Rush Mode], [Hyper Rush Mode]), a small winning combination of decorative symbols (for example, "3V3", etc.) is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5.

In this way, at the end of the small win, the start screen of one of the production modes ([rush mode], [hyper rush mode] in this example) controlled after the end of the big win game state corresponding to the small win is displayed. By predetermining the combination of decoration patterns, the processing load related to performance control at the start of any performance mode controlled after the end of the big winning game state corresponding to the small winning can be reduced.

If the V winning designation command has not been received (NO in step S09TM3010), that is, if a small hit puncture has occurred during the small win game, the effect control CPU 120 sets a power interruption recovery flag. is set (step S09TM3030).

When the power interruption recovery flag is not set (NO in step S09TM3030), the effect control CPU 120 displays a combination of decorative symbols for a big hit as a combination of decorative symbols displayed after the end of the small winning game. Determine (step S09TM3040), and proceed to step S09TM3050.

As described above in step S09TM1070 in FIG. 9-9 and in FIG. 9-10 (B2), when the display result is a "minor hit", the decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is displayed. When a combination is determined, a ``big win combination of decorative patterns'' is decided, and a ``small winning combination of decorative patterns'' corresponding to this jackpot combination of decorative patterns is also decided.

The ``big win combination of decorative symbols'' determined to be displayed after the small win is completed in step S09TM3040 is the ``decoration symbol combination for small wins'' determined in advance together with the ``small winning combination of decorative symbols'' in step S09TM1070 of FIG. It is a "big hit combination of symbols", and is not controlled to a big hit game state based on the occurrence of a small hit puncture, but is controlled after the small hit game ends (in this example, [Rush mode], [ It is a combination of decoration patterns displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 on the start screen of the normal mode]).

For example, in the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning game state, a small winning combination of decorative symbols (for example, "3V3" etc.) corresponding to the display result becoming "small winning" , Display (stop display, fixed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and any production mode ([Rush mode], [Normal mode] controlled after the end of the small hit game state ), a big winning combination of decorative symbols (for example, “333”) corresponding to the small winning combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5.

Thus, at the end of the small win, if a small win puncture occurs, one of the production modes (in this example, [rush mode], [normal mode]) that is controlled after the end of the small win game state is started. By determining in advance the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed on the screen, processing related to performance control at the start of any performance mode that is controlled after the end of the small winning game state when a small winning puncture occurs. You can reduce the burden.

After the processing of step S09TM3040, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the third flag is set (step S09TM3050).

If the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM3050), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S09TM3070.

When the third flag is not set (NO in step S09TM3050), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the remaining time reduction control count is zero (step S09TM3060).

When the number of times of remaining time reduction control is not 0 times (NO in step S09TM3060), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the number of remaining time reduction controls is 0 (YES in step S09TM3060), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S09TM3070.

If the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM3050), or if the third flag is not set and the remaining time reduction control count is 0 (YES in step S09TM3060), for effect control The CPU 120 sets a result display flag, which will be described later (step S09TM3070), and terminates the process.

The "result display flag" in this embodiment means that, at the end of the small hit, (A) if the V winning designation command is not received with the third flag set, or (B) the first flag or the It is a kind of flag that is set when the V winning designation command is not received in a state where the number of times of remaining time reduction control is 0 when 2 flags are set. This "result display flag" is a flag indicating that the result display is displayed during the small hit ED period, and is erased at the timing when the small hit ED period ends.

In addition, when it is determined that the power failure recovery flag is set after the determination of NO in step S09TM3010 (YES in step S09TM3030), the effect control CPU 120 changes the decoration pattern displayed after the end of the small hit. It is decided to display a special combination of decoration symbols as a combination (step S09TM3080), and the process is terminated as it is.

In this way, when the V winning designation command is not received and the power interruption restoration flag is set (when proceeding to the processing after step S09TM3080), the result display flag is set (step S09TM3070). is not executed, power failure occurs during the small winning game state, and the result display flag is not set when control is performed to the normal state without winning V during the small winning game state after the power is turned on. As a result, the result display is not displayed on the image display device 5 when the normal state is controlled in the above situation.

The result display is not displayed on the image display device 5 when power failure occurs during the small winning game state and when the small winning blowout occurs during the small winning game state after the power is turned on and the control is made to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling regretful. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the performance control for displaying the result display is not performed after power failure occurs and the power is turned on, the accurate number of big hits and the total number of awarded balls can be obtained by the performance control CPU 120. It is possible to reduce the processing load of effect control after power-on, which is difficult to grasp.

The “special combination of decorative symbols” determined to be displayed after the small win is completed in step S09TM3080 means that (X) when power is cut off and power is turned on during the small win game, the small win puncture occurs in the small win game. One of the production modes ([Rush mode], [Normal mode] in this example) that occurs and is controlled after the end of the small win game without being controlled to the big win game state based on the occurrence of the small win puncture. On the start screen, a combination of decoration symbols different from the "combination of decoration symbols for small winning" determined in advance in step S09TM1070 of FIG. is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, this "special combination of decorative patterns" is different from the "combination for losing decorative patterns" and the "big hit combination of decorative patterns" described above in the case of (X) and (Y ) This is a combination of decorative patterns dedicated to the recovery start screen during a small winning game when power is cut off and turned on during a small winning game. In this example, when the "special combination of decoration symbols" is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of "135" decoration symbols is displayed.

For example, in the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning game state, a small winning combination of decorative symbols (for example, "3V3" etc.) corresponding to the display result becoming "small winning" , is displayed (stopped display, fixed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and (X) a small win puncture occurs in the small win game, and a big win is won based on the occurrence of the small win puncture. On the start screen of one of the production modes ([Rush mode], [Normal mode]) controlled after the end of the small win game without being controlled in the game state, a special combination of decorative symbols (for example, "135") , are displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG.

In this way, at the end of the small win, when power failure occurs during the small win game state, and when a small win puncture occurs in this small win game, any production mode that is controlled after the end of the small win game state. (In this example, [Rush mode], [Normal mode]) By determining in advance the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed on the start screen, power interruption occurs during the small win game state, and this small win To reduce the processing load related to performance control at the start of any performance mode controlled after the end of a small winning game state when a small winning puncture occurs in a game.

[Combination of decorative patterns when power is restored]
In this embodiment, a combination of decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as “initial appearance”) is It shall be changed according to the game state when it occurs. In addition, in the following description, when the power failure occurs, the case where the variable display of the special symbol is not executed will be described.

The game state when the power failure occurs is a game state other than the small win game state (normal state excluding the period of the small win game state, time saving state excluding the period of the small win game state, jackpot game state, etc.) In this case, the initial combination of decorative symbols (for example, "123") is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on. be.

On the other hand, if the game state when the power failure occurs is the small winning game state, the symbol display areas 5L and 5C are displayed on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on (in the case of (Y) described above). , 5R, a special combination of decorative symbols (for example, "135") is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols (initial appearance).

[Production control command]
In this embodiment, the effect control command shown in the explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6 is adopted. The production control command which changed the name and the contents among the production|presentation control commands which adopted is demonstrated.

<Design Confirmation Command>
The symbol confirmation designation command in this embodiment will be described below. In the present embodiment, a symbol determination designation command is set to designate termination of the variable display of the first and second special symbols and a symbol determination period until the next variable display is started.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of symbol confirmation designation commands are set as the symbol confirmation designation commands. In this embodiment, as an example of the symbol confirmation designation command, "symbol confirmation A designation command", "symbol confirmation B designation command", and "symbol confirmation C designation command" are set.

"Pattern Confirmation A Designation Command" designates that, in the fluctuation display except for the time-saving final fluctuation display, the fluctuation display in which the display result is "loss" is terminated, and that the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. It is a production control command.

"Design confirmation B designation command" is an effect control command that specifies that the fluctuation display in which the display result is "missing" in the fluctuation display of the time saving final fluctuation display and that the design confirmation period is 10 seconds. is.

The ``symbol fixation C specification command'' is an effect control command for specifying that the variable display in which the display result is a ``big hit'' or a ``minor win'' and that the pattern fixation period is 1 second.

<Jack start designation command>
A jackpot start designation command in this embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state is set for each jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-2.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot start designation commands are set as the jackpot start designation commands. In this embodiment, as an example of the jackpot start designation command, "jackpot start A designation command", "jackpot start B designation command", "jackpot start C designation command", and "jackpot start D" according to the jackpot type Specified command” and “big hit start E specified command” are set.

<Jack end designation command>
A jackpot end designation command in this embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, a jackpot end designation command for designating the end of the jackpot game state is set for each jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-2.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot end designation commands are set as the jackpot end designation commands. In this embodiment, as an example of the jackpot end designation command, according to the jackpot type, "jackpot end A designation command", "jackpot end B designation command", "jackpot end C designation command", and "jackpot end D A designated command" and a "jackpot end E designated command" are set.

<Small hit start designation command>
A small hit start designation command in this embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, a small hit start designation command for designating the start of the small hit game state is set for each big hit type shown in FIG. 9-2.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of small winning start designation commands are set as the small winning start designation command. In the present embodiment, as an example of the small hit start designation command, according to the big hit type, "small hit start A designation command", "small hit start B designation command", "small hit start C designation command", A "small hit start D designation command" and a "small hit start E designation command" are set.

<Small hit end designation command>
A small hit end designation command in the present embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, a small-hit end designation command for designating the end of the small-hit game state is set for each big-hit type shown in FIG. 9-2.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of small hit end designation commands are set as the small hit end designation command. In the present embodiment, as an example of the small-hit end designation command, according to the jackpot type, "small-hit end A designation command", "small-hit end B designation command", "small-hit end C designation command", A "small hit end D designation command" and a "small hit end E designation command" are set.

[Display timing of result display]
In this embodiment, any of the following timings can be set as the timing for starting the display of the result display showing the information related to the number of big hits and the total number of awarded balls.
(A) Timing of receiving the pattern confirmation designation command with the final fluctuation of time reduction (B) Timing of receiving the small hit end designation command with the small hit corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation In the following explanation, the game state is the time reduction state (low probability / high The variable display that is executed when it is controlled to the base state) is appropriately referred to as "time reduction variation" or "time reduction variation display". In addition, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state, the variable display executed in the state where the number of remaining time saving control becomes 0 is appropriately called "time saving final change" or "time saving final change display".

<(A) Timing of receiving the pattern confirmation designation command with the final variation of time saving>
(A) In the present embodiment, in the time-saving final variation display in which the display result is "loss", the effect control CPU 120 that receives the symbol confirmation B designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the special symbol, A result display is displayed on the display device 5 . At this time, the production mode is controlled to one of [challenge mode], [rush mode], or [hyper rush mode].

Then, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the result display over the pattern confirmation period (10 seconds) set based on the reception of the symbol confirmation B designation command. In addition, if there is one or more pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending (maximum four in this example)) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred before the end of the time saving final variable display, the pending memories The result display is displayed on the image display device 5 over the period during which the variable display corresponding to is executed and the symbol fixing period corresponding to the reserved storage.

<Time chart related to (A)>
FIG. 9-17 is a time chart showing the timing of displaying the result display in case (A) described above. In this example, the display result of the time saving final variation display is "missing", and there are 4 pending memories (variable displays whose execution is suspended) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the time saving final variation display ended. , shows an example of displaying a result display when both display results are "no".

In the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "missing", the CPU 103 is the timing of ending the variation display of the second special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-17), and the design confirmation B designation command is received. The CPU 120 for the game causes the image display device 5 to display the result display.

Then, the pattern confirmation period (10 seconds) has passed, and the CPU 103 is the timing (Fig. At the timing of T2A shown in 9-17), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to continuously display the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol (the timing of T2B shown in FIG. 9-17), the effect control CPU 120 which receives the symbol confirmation A designation command displays the result on the image display device 5. display continuously.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 similarly continues the result display on the image display device 5 for the variable display corresponding to the second, third, and fourth reserved memories among the four reserved memories. display.

Next, at the timing (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-17) when the pattern confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display corresponding to the fourth reserved memory has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 changes the image display device 5 Clear the result display from

In this embodiment, for a total of 1.5 seconds, the image A result display is displayed on the display device 5 . In this example, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (the period of T2A to T6 shown in FIG. 9-17). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the result display is displayed for a total period of the symbol fixing period (10 seconds) and 1.5×the number of reserved memories (0 to 4)=0 to 6 seconds.

<(B) Timing of receiving a small hit end designation command with a small hit corresponding to time-saving fluctuation>
(B) In this embodiment, (B-1) the display result when the production mode is [challenge mode] or [rush mode] is a "small hit", and (B-2) production A small hit puncture occurs in a small hit game corresponding to the time-saving fluctuation display in which the display result when the mode is [Hyper Rush Mode] is "small hit" (that is, the result display flag is set), and the CPU 103 At the timing of ending the small-hit game, the performance control CPU 120 that has received the small-hit end designation command causes the image display device 5 to display the result display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result on the image display device 5 over the small hit ED period (3 seconds) based on the setting of the result display flag and the reception of the small hit end designation command. display. In addition, the suspension memory (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the end of the last variation display (previous variation display) when it is controlled in the time saving state When there is one or more variable displays, the image display device 5 is displayed during the period during which the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is executed (variable display period) and the symbol determination period corresponding to the variable display. Display the result display.

<Time chart related to (B)>
FIG. 9-18 is a time chart showing the timing of displaying the result display in the above case (B). In this example, when the above-mentioned (B-1) production mode is [Challenge mode] or [Rush mode], the display result is "small win" in the small win game corresponding to the time-saving final variation display. Puncture occurs (result display flag is set), and there are four pending memories (variable display whose execution is suspended) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the end of the time saving final variable display. This shows an example of displaying a result display when the display result is also "missing".

In the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "small hit", at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variation display of the special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-18), the symbol confirmation C designation command is received. The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to display the result display.

Then, the symbol determination period (1 second) has passed, and at the timing when the CPU 103 controls the game state to the small hit game state (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-18), the small hit start designation command is received. The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to continuously display the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small hit game state (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the small hit end designation command has the result display flag set. Based on this, the image display device 5 is caused to display the result display.

Then, the small hit ED period (3 seconds) has passed, the CPU 103 ends the small hit game state, and the next second special symbol variation display (corresponding to the first reserved memory among the four reserved memories) At the timing of starting the variable display (the timing of T4A shown in FIG. 9-18), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to continuously display the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol (the timing of T4B shown in FIG. 9-18), the effect control CPU 120 which receives the symbol confirmation A designation command displays the result on the image display device 5. display continuously.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 similarly continues the result display on the image display device 5 for the variable display corresponding to the second, third, and fourth reserved memories among the four reserved memories. display.

Next, at the timing (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-18) when the pattern confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display corresponding to the fourth reserved memory has passed, the effect control CPU 120 changes the image display device 5 Clear the result display from

In this embodiment, for a total of 1.5 seconds, the image A result display is displayed on the display device 5 . In this example, the number of pending memories is 4, so the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (the period of T4A to T8 shown in FIG. 9-18). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the result display is displayed over the total period of the small winning ending period (3 seconds) and 1.5×the number of pending memories (0 to 4)=0 to 6 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, when it is controlled to the normal state after the time saving or the small hit puncture, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period (symbol confirmation period, By being displayed over the small winning ending period), the player can accurately recognize the information related to the number of big winnings and the total number of awarded balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example in which the small hit end A designation command to the small hit end E designation command is set as the small hit end designation command is shown, but not limited to such a form, other types of small A winning end designation command may be set.

For example, when the V prize is not generated at the end of the small win, the CPU 103 sets a flag indicating that the small win puncture has occurred, and transmits a special small win end F designation command when the small win puncture occurs. You may This small-hit end F specification command is a kind of effect control command that specifies that the small-hit game state has ended and that the small-hit ending period is 10 seconds. The 10 seconds of the small winning ending period specified by this small winning ending F specifying command is longer than the small winning ending period at the end of the normal small winning game state, and the result is displayed during the small winning ending period. It is a period in which it is possible to

[Modified example of presence/absence of result display]
In the above embodiment, (B-1) the display result when the production mode is [challenge mode] or [rush mode] is a "small hit", and (B-2) production When the mode is [Hyper rush mode], a small hit blowout occurs in the small hit game corresponding to the time-saving fluctuation display in which the display result is "small hit", and the CPU 103 terminates the small hit game. The effect control CPU 120 that receives the hit end designation command shows an example of displaying the result display on the image display device 5, but is not limited to such a form, and corresponds to (B-1) and (B-2) When a small winning blowout occurs in the small winning game played, the result display may not be displayed on the image display device 5 at any timing. In this case, the result display can be prevented from being displayed by setting the result display flag not to be set in step S09TM3070.

For example, (B-1) When the production mode is [challenge mode] or [rush mode], a small hit blowout occurs in a small hit game corresponding to the time-saving final fluctuation display in which the display result is "small hit". (The result display flag is not set), there are 4 pending memories (variable display whose execution is pending) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the end of the time saving final variable display, and any display result is " In the case of "loss", the effect control CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to display the result display in the small winning ending period or the variable display period corresponding to the pending memory.

[Modified example of display timing of result display]
In this embodiment, when a small hit puncture occurs and the result display flag is set, the timing to start displaying the result display showing information related to the number of big hits and the total number of awarded balls is ( B) An example that can be set at the timing of receiving a small hit end designation command with a small hit corresponding to a short time fluctuation is shown, but not limited to such a form, a small hit puncture occurs and the result display flag is set If so, the timing for starting the display of the result display may be set to a timing different from (B).

For example, when a small hit puncture occurs and the result display flag is set, the timing to start displaying the result display showing information related to the number of big hits and the total number of awarded balls is as follows. Can be set.
(C) Timing of receiving the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first variation display after the end of the small hit

<(C) Timing of receiving the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first variation display after the end of the small hit>
(C) In this embodiment, (C-1) the display result when the production mode is [challenge mode] or [rush mode] is a "small hit", and (C-2) production A small hit puncture occurs in a small hit game corresponding to the time-saving fluctuation display in which the display result when the mode is [Hyper Rush Mode] is "small hit" (that is, the result display flag is set), and the CPU 103 Suspension memory (execution is suspended (maximum 4 in this example) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the end of the last variable display when the small winning game was ended and the time-saving state was controlled Variable display), at the timing of starting the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory, the effect control CPU 120, which receives the variable pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display, displays the image. Display the result display on the device 5 .

Then, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the result display flag is set and the fact that the variation pattern designation command is received, determines the variation display period and the symbol determination period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to the variation display. ) to display the result display on the image display device 5 . Similarly, the period during which the variable display corresponding to the remaining pending memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred until the end of the last variable display when being controlled in the time saving state is executed, and the variable display The result display is displayed on the image display device 5 over the pattern fixing period.

<Time chart related to (C)>
FIGS. 9-19 are time charts showing the timing of displaying the result display in the above case (C). In this example, when the above-mentioned (C-1) production mode is [challenge mode] or [rush mode], the display result is "small win" in the small win game corresponding to the short-time final variation display. There are 4 pending memories (variable displays whose execution is suspended) corresponding to starting winnings that occurred before the puncture occurred (the result display flag was set) and the time-saving final variable display ended, and any display result This shows an example of displaying a result display when the result is also "missing".

In the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "small win", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-19), the symbol confirmation C designation command is received. The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to display the result display.

Then, the symbol determination period (1 second) has passed, and at the timing when the CPU 103 controls the game state to the small hit game state (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-19), the small hit start designation command is received for effect control The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to continuously display the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small hitting game state (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-19), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the small hitting end designation command displays the result on the image display device 5. do not display.

Then, the small hit ED period (3 seconds) has passed, the CPU 103 ends the small hit game state, and the next second special symbol variation display (corresponding to the first reserved memory among the four reserved memories) At the timing of starting the variable display) (timing of T4A shown in FIGS. 9-19), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the variable pattern designation command is based on the fact that the result display flag is set, the image display device 5 display the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol (the timing of T4B shown in FIG. 9-19), the effect control CPU 120 which receives the symbol confirmation A designation command displays the result on the image display device 5. display continuously.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 similarly continues the result display on the image display device 5 for the variable display corresponding to the second, third, and fourth reserved memories among the four reserved memories. display.

Next, at the timing (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-19) when the pattern confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display corresponding to the fourth reserved memory has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image. Clear the result display from the device 5.

In this embodiment, for a total of 1.5 seconds, the image A result display is displayed on the display device 5 . In this example, the number of pending memories is 4, so the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (period of T4A to T8 shown in FIG. 9-19). Therefore, in this embodiment, the result display is displayed for a period of 1.5×the number of pending memories (0 to 4)=0 to 6 seconds.

Here, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 has not transmitted the variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120 because there is no reserved memory. In this modified example in which the display control of the result display is started based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 which has not received the variation pattern designation command cannot start the display of the result display. In this case, the result display may be displayed during a predetermined period after the small win ending period (such as the period until the next variable display is started while the customer is waiting).

In this embodiment, the result display is a common presentation mode in any of the above-described cases (A) to (C). That is, the result display displayed during the pattern fixing period corresponding to the time saving final fluctuation and the small winning ending period, and the result display displayed during the fluctuation display period corresponding to the pending memory and the pattern fixing period are in a common production mode. be. In this example, the result display includes the characters "FEVER x X" indicating the number of big hits (X = number of big hits) and the characters "TOTAL YYYYpt" indicating the total number of awarded balls (YYYY = awarded prize balls). ) (see FIG. 9-25 (19)).

In this embodiment, when the display result is either "big hit" or "minor hit" in the 1st to 4th rotations of the remaining hold in the challenge mode or the rush mode, the 1st to 4th rotations of the remaining hold in the hyper rush mode A variation pattern may be determined using a [big win/minor win] variation pattern determination table that is common to the case where the display result is either a "big hit" or a "minor win" in a rotating eye.

In this case, in any production mode of challenge mode, rush mode, or hyper rush mode, if the display result becomes either "big hit" or "small hit" in the 1st to 4th rotations of the remaining hold , a result presentation is executed to display a result display showing information related to the number of big hits and the total number of awarded balls, and a revival presentation to display a shooting star in the result display is executed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment in which the result display is a common mode of presentation regardless of the situation, shooting stars are displayed in the result display even when the result display is displayed in any of cases (A) to (C). It is possible to make the player expect that the resurrection presentation to be executed will be executed, and to enhance interest when the result display is displayed.

In the above embodiment, the result display is displayed when the pending memory (variable display whose execution is suspended) corresponding to the starting prize generated before the end of the time saving final variable display is 0 pieces. is possible, but not limited to such a form, there are 0 pending memories (variable displays whose execution is suspended) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the end of the time saving final variable display. In some cases, the display of the result display may be restricted.

For example, when there are 0 pending memories (variable displays whose execution is suspended) corresponding to the starting prize generated before the completion of the time-saving final variable display, the result display is not displayed during the small winning ending period. In this case, since the pending memory is 0, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory is not executed, and the display result becomes "big win" or "minor win" and the resurrection effect is not executed. , it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the resurrection performance to be executed by displaying the result display.

[Customer waiting demonstration]
In the present embodiment, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the image display device 5 displays the It is possible to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect in which a demonstration display (demonstration display) is displayed.
In this example, the demo display includes the characters "DEMO" and the notification image (in this example, an image displaying the characters "P Fever XXX" (the name of the gaming machine)).

[Demonstration display effect determination process]
FIG. 9-20 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process that is executed while waiting until the start of the variable display (hereinafter referred to as "waiting for customers", "waiting for customers", etc.). The effect control CPU 120 executes the demonstration display effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-20 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) while waiting for the customer by the demonstration display effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-20.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step S09TM4010). If the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (YES at step 09TM4010), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the customer waiting demonstration effect is not being executed (NO in step S09TM4010), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demo specifying command has been received (step S09TM4020). If the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received (NO in step S09TM4020), effect control CPU 120 terminates the process.

When the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (YES in step S09TM4020), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the conditions for executing the customer waiting demo effect are satisfied, referring to the customer waiting demo effect execution condition table (Fig. 9-21(A)) (step S09TM4030). If the execution condition for the customer waiting demonstration effect is not satisfied (NO in step S09TM4030), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the condition for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect is satisfied (YES in step S09TM4030), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the customer waiting demo effect, and ends the process.

<Execution condition table for customer waiting demonstration>
FIG. 9-21(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an execution condition table for the customer waiting demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 9-21(A), the execution condition table for the customer waiting demonstration effect includes a condition number (condition No.) and the corresponding execution condition for the customer waiting demonstration effect (power interruption recovery flag). (presence/absence of setting, customer waiting time) are stored in association with each other. The customer waiting waiting time is the elapsed time when there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer.
Each condition number and the condition for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect corresponding to this condition number will be described in detail below.

(Condition No. “SP-01”)
Condition no. In "SP-01", as execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration effect, whether or not the power failure recovery flag is set is "(the power failure recovery flag) is not set", and the customer waiting time is "60 seconds or more". is set to
That is, when the customer waiting time has passed 60 seconds in a state in which the power failure recovery flag is not set, this condition No. "SP-01" is established.

(Condition No. “SP-02”)
Condition no. In "SP-02", as execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration effect, whether or not the power failure recovery flag is set is "(the power failure recovery flag is set)", and the customer waiting time is "10 seconds or longer". is set to
That is, in the state in which the power failure recovery flag is set, at the timing when the customer waiting waiting time has passed for 10 seconds, this condition No. "SP-02" is established.

In this way, the customer waiting time until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed when there is a power interruption immediately before is equal to the customer waiting time until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed when there is no power interruption immediately before. A period shorter than the waiting time can be set, and an appropriate period can be set as a period until execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

[Restoration notification effect]
In the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power outage, it is possible to execute a recovery notification effect that displays a recovery display that notifies that the power has been restored from the power outage. The restoration display is an image including the characters “power outage restoration in progress” displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 .

In the present embodiment, the restoration display is an image having a higher display priority than various effect images (background image, decoration pattern, etc.). Further, the second promotion image displayed when the power is restored from the power failure during the small winning is an image having a higher display priority than the restoration display. Therefore, it appears to the player that the second promotion image, the recovery display, and various effect images are displayed in this order. However, in this example, since the display area of the recovery display is the entire screen of the image display device 5, it is difficult to visually recognize various effects images (see FIG. 9-27(2)). Here, "high display priority" means, for example, that the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground.

In this embodiment, when the power is turned on after the power failure (recovery of power failure), in the process of transmitting the command at the time of recovery of the game control main process shown in FIG. The game state at the time of recovery specified by the production control command (for example, the game state designation command at the time of recovery) that specifies the game state before the power interruption that is backed up among the production control commands that instruct recovery from the power interruption (hereinafter referred to as , arbitrarily referred to as “recovery game state”), the execution period of the recovery notification effect can be varied (see FIG. 9-21 (B)).

<Execution period determination table for recovery notification effect>
FIG. 9-21(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution period determination table for the restoration notification effect. As shown in FIG. 9-21(B), in this embodiment, the execution period of the restoration notification effect is determined according to the game state at the time of restoration.

When the game state at the time of recovery is the "small win game state", the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "0.5 seconds or less".

When the recovery time game state is the "small winning game state", "0.5 seconds or less" of the execution period of the recovery notification effect is controlled to the small winning game state at the time of power failure recovery in this embodiment. When the remaining control period (hereinafter referred to as the ``remaining small winning period'') is 0.5 seconds or more, the execution period of the restoration notification effect is determined to be ``0.5 seconds'', and when the power is restored. When the remaining small winning period is 0.5 seconds or less, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined as "(remaining small winning period -0.004) seconds". For example, when the remaining small winning period is 0.3 seconds at the time of power failure restoration, the execution period of the restoration notification effect is determined to be "(0.3-0.004)=0.296 seconds".

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the recovery time game state at the time of power failure recovery is the small winning game state, the remaining small winning period is any period, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is the remaining small winning period set for a shorter period. That is, before the small winning game state at the time of recovery from the power failure is completed, the restoration notification effect is completed, and the display of the restoration display is also completed.

When the recovery game state is "a game state other than a small win game state", the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "5 seconds". The "game state other than the small-hit game state" is "normal state excluding the period of the small-hit game state" or "big-hit game state".

[Example of production when V winning occurs, small hit blowout occurs]
Next, examples of effects when a V prize is generated and when a small hit blowout is generated will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-22 to 9-25.

FIG. 9-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to when a V winning occurs and when a small winning blowout occurs, and FIGS. 9-23 to 9-25 show a V winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect|effect image relevant when when it does and when a small-hit puncture occurs.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to the [rush mode], the second special symbol variation display is executed in which the display result is "small hit", and in the small win game corresponding to this variation display, V It is assumed that a jackpot game is performed in which a prize is generated and the type of jackpot via a jackpot is "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via a jackpot (99 times)". After that, when the performance mode is controlled to the [hyper rush mode], the variation display of the second special symbol with the display result as "small win" is executed, and the small win is achieved in the small win game corresponding to this variable display. It is assumed that a puncture occurs and the result display is displayed without the big win game being played.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (1), the effect control CPU 120 is, at the timing (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-22) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern, the pattern display of the image display device 5. A ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying decorative patterns including the character "C" and the number "3" in the area 5L and the pattern display area 5R. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decoration pattern is stopped, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 09TM03E to display the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number display area 09TM05E, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number display area 09TM06E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the characters "rush mode" to be displayed in the upper center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the effect mode is [rush mode], and the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. In response to the fact that the number of remaining time reduction control is 5 times, characters of "remaining 5 times" are displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a third promotion image in the lower right portion of the screen. This third promotion image is an image containing characters "Right-handed" and a third arrow image 09TM13A instructing right-handed in order to win a prize in the second starting prize-winning slot or to win a V prize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), at the timing to display the operation prompting display 09TM31B in the variation pattern (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 An operation prompting display 09TM31B prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (3), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated by the player (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 executes the symbol stop action effect. Then, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an action (in this example, a decorative symbol including the character "C" and the number "3" and the character " "V" and the decorative pattern containing the letter "V", and the decorative pattern containing the character "C" and the number "3" are enlarged and moved), the pattern stop sound production is executed, and the pattern stop effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Play back the sound. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-22), effect control for receiving the symbol confirmation C designation command The CPU 120 ends the symbol stop action production, ends the action of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and performs the final small winning combination of the decorative symbols ("3V3" in this example). The player is fixed and stopped, the design stop sound presentation is ended, and the reproduction output of the pattern stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("3V3" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 09TM03 is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), when the CPU 103 starts the small hit game state (period of T5 to T6 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 is the first promotion effect In the example, the first promotion flashing effect, the promotion sound effect production, and the first promotion image production) are executed, and the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L is flashed (lighted) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds. , the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output promotional sound effects, and the image display device 5 displays the first promotional image (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of the animation action (the first arrow image displayed in the entire central portion of the screen) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), when the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened during the small winning game, the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is within a predetermined valid period. At the timing when the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a (the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 performs part of the first promotion effect (promoting effect sound effect, the first At the same time as ending the promotion image effect displaying the first arrow image and the characters "Aim for V"), a V prize occurrence notification display (in this example, "V GET") is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is displayed.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small hit gaming state (the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 performs the small hit end effect determination process (see FIG. 9-16). It is decided to display a small winning combination of decorative symbols as a combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the end of the big winning game corresponding to the winning (step S09TM3020).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the big hit game state (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the big hit start designation command, The entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed with characters "MAX FEVER" for notifying that the kind of jackpot via small win is "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small win".

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the big hit game state (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the jackpot end designation command, Over the jackpot ending period, the telop display 09TM20 including the characters "HYPER" and the characters "battle rush" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the next controlled performance mode is the "hyper rush mode". to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (9), at the timing when the jackpot ending period ends (timing of T10 shown in FIG. 9-22), the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to [hyper rush mode]. Then, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decoration symbols for the small win ("3V3" in this example) determined in the effect determination process at the end of the small win is displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("3V3" in this example) is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the active display 09TM03 in the active display area 09TM03E in response to the fact that the variable display is not being executed at present. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number display area 09TM05E, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number display area 09TM06E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the characters "hyper rush mode" to be displayed in the upper center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the effect mode is [hyper rush mode], and the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A telop display including characters "HYPER" is displayed in the upper right part and the lower left part of the screen. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a third promotion image in the lower right portion of the screen. This third promotion image is an image containing characters "Right-handed" and a third arrow image 09TM13A instructing right-handed in order to win a prize in the second starting prize-winning slot or to win a V prize.

In this embodiment, when the production mode is the [hyper rush mode], the screen of the image display device 5 does not display information related to the number of remaining time-saving controls. This is because, when the production mode is the [hyper rush mode], the player is annoyed by displaying the number of remaining time reductions in this configuration in which the next "big hit" or "small hit" is substantially determined. This is to prevent the player from feeling the urge to lose interest in the game.

As shown in FIGS. 9-23 (3) and (4), in the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning game state, the decoration corresponding to the display result being "small winning" "3V3" as a small winning combination of symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (stop display, fixed stop), and as shown in FIG. On the start screen of the production mode ([hyper rush mode] in this example) controlled after the end of the big-hit game state corresponding to the small-hit, "3V3" is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols for the small-hit. They are displayed in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the present embodiment, each variable display is appropriately referred to as "variable display (time-saving N-th rotation)" according to the number of rotations of the variable display that is executed under control in the time-saving state. For example, when the number of rotations of the variable display that is executed under the control of the time saving state is the "first rotation", the variable display is called "variation display (first rotation of the time saving)", and is controlled to the time saving state. When the number of rotations of the variable display to be executed is "7th rotation", the variable display is referred to as "variable display (time-saving 7th rotation)".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (10), a new starting winning to the second starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 6B) occurs, and the CPU 103 determines that the second special winning in which the display result is "lost". When the variation display of the pattern (the first rotation of the time saving) is started, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display of symbols is started (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 9-22). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 09TM03E.

In this example, during the period in which this variable display is being executed, two new start winnings to the second start winning opening (variable winning ball device 6B) occur (both of the pending memories display results as "missing"). Then, it is assumed that the second reserved memory number is "2", "2" is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 09TM06E, and two second reserved displays 09TM02 are displayed in the second reserved display area 09TM02E. do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11), at the timing (timing of T12 shown in FIG. 9-22) where the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol (the first rotation of the time reduction), the symbol confirmation A designation The effect control CPU 120 that has received the command determines and stops the final combination of decorative symbols for losing ("142" in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("142" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, after the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the second special symbol (the second rotation of the time reduction, the third rotation of the time reduction), as shown in FIG. When the starting winning to the device 6B) occurs, and the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol in which the display result is a "minor hit" (fourth rotation of the short time), the effect control CPU 120 issues a variation pattern designation command. Based on the variation pattern designated by , the variable display of decorative designs is started in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 9-22). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 09TM03E.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (13), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pattern of the image display device 5 at the timing (timing of T14 shown in FIG. 9-22) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern. A ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying decorative patterns including the character "B" and the number "2" in the area 5L and the pattern display area 5R. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (14), at the timing to display the operation prompting display 09TM31B in the variation pattern (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 An operation prompting display 09TM31B prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (15), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated by the player (timing of T16 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 executes the symbol stop motion effect. Then, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an action (in this example, a decorative symbol including the character "B" and the number "2" and the character " "V" and the decorative pattern containing the letter "V", and the decorative pattern containing the character "B" and the number "2" are enlarged and moved), the pattern stop sound production is executed, and the pattern stop effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Play back the sound. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (16), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variation display of the second special symbol (timing of T17 shown in FIG. 9-22), effect control that receives the symbol confirmation C designation command The CPU 120 ends the symbol stop action effect, ends the action of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and performs the final small winning combination of the decorative symbols ("2V2" in this example). The player is fixed and stopped, the design stop sound presentation is ended, and the reproduction output of the pattern stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols ("2V2" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the active display 09TM03 is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (17), when the CPU 103 starts the small hit game state (period of T18 to T19 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 is the first promotion effect In the example, the first promotion flashing effect, the promotion sound effect production, and the first promotion image production) are executed, and the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L is flashed (lighted) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds. , the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output promotional sound effects, and the image display device 5 displays the first promotional image (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of the animation action (the first arrow image displayed in the entire central portion of the screen) is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (18), at a predetermined timing (timing of T19 shown in FIG. 9-22) to display a small hit end suggestion display to be described later, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. 5, a small win end suggestion display 09TM30 (in this example, an image in a display mode that cracks the screen) that suggests that the small win game state will end in a state where V winning has not occurred. display. This small-hit end suggestion display is an image with a higher display priority than various effect images (first promotion image, etc.) related to the small-hit game (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). be. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it seems as if the display indicating the end of the small win and the various effect images related to the small win game are displayed in this order.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined timing for displaying the small-hit end suggestion display" is set to the timing one second before the control of the small-hit game state ends. Therefore, the game state is controlled to the small win game state even during the period in which the indication indicating the end of the small win is displayed, and the player can win the V prize even though it is for a short time. Since such a form is adopted, even during the period in which the display suggesting the end of the small win is displayed, the third promotion image (characters of "Right-handed", third An arrow image 09TM13A) is displayed.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small hit gaming state (timing of T20 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control CPU 120 performs the small hit end effect determination process (see FIG. 9-16). It is decided to display a jackpot combination of decorative symbols as a combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the winning game is finished (step S09TM3040), and a result display flag is set (step S09TM3070).

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (19), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the small hit end designation command is based on the fact that the result display flag is set, the small hit ending period (shown in FIG. 9-22 Period T20 to T21), the result display 09TM40 (in this example, the characters "FEVER x 2" indicating the number of jackpots and "TOTAL 1950pt" indicating the total number of awarded balls) are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. characters).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first promotion effect (in this example, the first promotion flashing effect, the promotion sound effect effect, and the first promotion image effect), and blinks (lights up) the V-judgment winning device LED 87L. Then, the reproduction output of the promoting effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is terminated, and the first promoting image is erased from the image display device 5. - 特許庁

In this example, since the number of pending memories corresponding to the starting winning prize generated before the end of the last variation display (fourth rotation of time saving) when being controlled in the time saving state is 0 pieces, the small winning ending period The result display is displayed only in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), at the timing when the small winning ending period ends (timing of T21 shown in FIG. 9-22), the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode to [Normal mode (sunny mode )], and the combination of decorative symbols for big win (“222” in this example) determined in the effect determination process at the end of the small win is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small patterns ("222" in this example) is displayed. At this time, a sunny background image 09TM60A is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative pattern based on the effect mode being [normal mode (sunny mode)].

At this time, no action is performed on the combination of decorative patterns by not executing the pattern stop action performance, and the pattern stop sound effect is not reproduced and outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R by not executing the pattern stop sound performance. In this way, it is misunderstood that an event advantageous to the player is occurring due to the fact that the pattern stop action effect and the pattern stop sound effect are not executed when the [normal mode] is controlled via the small winning puncture. It is possible to prevent the player's feeling of regret from increasing after that.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the active display 09TM03 in the active display area 09TM03E in response to the fact that the variable display is not being executed at present. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number display area 09TM05E, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number display area 09TM06E.

As shown in FIGS. 9-24 (15) and (16), in the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning game state, the decoration corresponding to the display result being "small winning" “2V2” is displayed (stop display, fixed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 as a symbol combination for a small hit. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), on the start screen of the production mode (in this example, [normal mode]) controlled after the end of the small winning game state, a decorative pattern is displayed as a combination of decorative patterns. "222", which is a combination for a big hit, is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG.

[Example of production when electricity is cut off during a small hit, and when a small hit blowout occurs after restoration]
Next, examples of effects when power failure occurs during a small winning game and when a small winning blowout occurs after restoration will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-26 to 9-27.

FIG. 9-26 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to when power failure occurs during a small winning game and when a small winning blowout occurs after recovery, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation image relevant when power failure generate|occur|produces during a winning game, and when a small-hit puncture occurs after recovery.

In this example, it is assumed that a power failure occurs in the small winning game state controlled when it is in the [hyper rush mode], and a small winning puncture occurs in the small winning game state controlled again after the power is turned on.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the small hit game state (period of T1 to T2 shown in FIG. 9-26), the effect control CPU 120 is the first promotion effect In the example, the first promotion flashing effect, the promotion sound effect production, and the first promotion image production) are executed, and the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L is flashed (lighted) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds. , the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output promotional sound effects, and the image display device 5 displays the first promotional image (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of the animation action (the first arrow image displayed in the entire central portion of the screen) is displayed.

Next, at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-26, power failure occurs while being controlled to the small winning game state, and the power is turned on at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-26.

At this time, since the game state when the power failure occurs is the small winning game state, the symbol display areas 5L and 5C are displayed on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on (the screen shown in FIG. 9-27 (2)). , and 5R, a special combination of decoration symbols ("135" in this example) is displayed as a combination of decoration symbols (initial appearance).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (2), when the CPU 103 controls the small winning game state which is the game state at the time of the power failure after the power failure has occurred (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-26 ), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the game state designation command at the time of recovery executes the recovery notification effect, and the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, includes the characters “recovering from power failure” on the entire screen of the image display device 5). image) is displayed, a second promotion effect (in this example, a second promotion flashing effect, a second promotion image effect) is executed, and the V judgment winning device LED 87L turns red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds. It blinks (lights up), and causes the image display device 5 to display a second promotional image (second arrow image 09TM12A, characters "Please put a ball in V").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 receives each effect image (decorative pattern (in this example, an initial A special combination of decorative symbols as a result "135"), a small pattern ("135" in this example), the first reserved memory number ("0" in this example), the second reserved memory number display area (this In this example, "0", etc.) and a background image (a sunny background image in this example) are displayed. However, the restoration display is an image that has a higher display priority than the various effect images (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize various effect images.

In this example, based on the fact that the remaining small winning period at the time of power failure recovery is 0.5 seconds or more (for example, 3 seconds), it is assumed that the execution period of the restoration notification effect is determined to be "0.5 seconds". (See Figure 9-21).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), at the timing (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-26) after 0.5 seconds, which is the execution period of the restoration notification production, the production control CPU 120 restores The notification effect is terminated, and the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, an image including the characters "recovering from power outage") is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the second promotion effect (in this example, the second promotion flashing effect, the second promotion image effect), and turns the V judgment winning device LED 87L red at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds. (1 color) blinks (lights up), and the image display device 5 is caused to display the second promotion image (the second arrow image 09TM12A, the characters "Please put the ball in V").

At this time, the restoration notification effect is completed, and the restoration display 09TM70 (in this example, an image including the characters “recovering from power outage”) is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5. (Decorative pattern, small pattern, first reserved memory number display area, second reserved memory number display area, etc.) and a background image (in this example, a sunny background image) can be visually recognized.

In this way, after displaying the recovery display informing that the power has been recovered, the background image and decoration pattern corresponding to the [normal mode] can be immediately displayed even during the small winning game. Therefore, the player can grasp the situation in which the player should aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (perform a right-hand shot) in order to win a V prize (winning a prize in the V winning area 870), and the player can grasp the situation in which the player should aim at the V judgment prize winning device 87 (perform a right-hand shot). It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small hit gaming state (the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 9-26), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the small hit end designation command is the second promotion effect (in this example, the second 2 acceleration flashing effect, second promotion image effect) is ended, the blinking (light emission) of the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L is ended, and the second promotion image is erased from the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special combination of decoration symbols as a combination of decoration symbols to be displayed after the end of the small win game in the effect determination processing at the end of the small win (see FIG. 9-16). It is determined (step S09TM3080).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (4), at the timing when the small winning ending period ends (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-26), the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode to [Normal mode (sunny mode )], and displays a special combination of decorative symbols (“135” in this example) determined in the effect determination process at the end of the small hit in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Others are the same as those in FIG. 9-25 (20), so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), since the game state when the power failure occurs is the small win game state, the combination of decorative symbols on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on (initial appearance) As shown in FIG. 9-27 (4), a special combination of decorative patterns (“135” in this example) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. In the start screen of a performance mode [normal mode (sunny mode)] in which a small winning puncture occurs in a winning game and is controlled after the small winning game is finished without being controlled to a big winning game state based on the occurrence of the small winning puncturing. A special combination of decorative patterns ("135" in this example) is displayed as a combination of decorative patterns. Therefore, in FIGS. 9-27 (3) and (4), a special combination of common decorative patterns is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and common decorative patterns are displayed for the player. It seems that the special combination of is continuously displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (4), a special combination of decoration symbols ("135" in this example) is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, so that the current game state can be changed. The player clearly recognizes that the control situation is when power failure occurs during the small winning game state and control is performed to the normal state without winning the V prize during the small winning game state after the power is turned on. can be made

[Normal presentation mode (modified example)]
In the above embodiment, when the production mode is controlled from [Challenge mode] or [Rush mode] to [Normal mode] (after time saving), [Normal mode (sunny mode)] in [Normal mode] After that, when the production mode is controlled to [Normal mode], if it is possible to switch the production mode, various production modes including [Normal mode (sunny mode)] ([Normal mode (sunny mode) mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rain mode)])]), but not limited to this form, after the time saving, the production mode is [ When the production mode can be switched while being controlled to [Normal mode], the production mode of [Normal mode] that cannot be switched may be set.

For example, [Normal mode (revenge mode)] is set in [Normal mode]. When the production mode is controlled to the [normal mode (revenge mode)], the production control CPU 120 displays a "volcano background image" showing a volcanic landscape including a volcano as a background image of the decoration pattern. become.

The production mode of this [normal mode (revenge mode)] is always controlled when the production mode is controlled from [challenge mode] or [rush mode] to [normal mode] via time saving. That is, [Normal mode (revenge mode)] is set as a fixed production mode that is controlled after the short working hours. After that, when the production mode is controlled to [Normal mode], if it is possible to switch the production mode at a predetermined opportunity (for example, 20 times of variable display after the time saving is finished), [Normal mode While it is possible to switch to various production modes ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rain mode)]) that do not include [Revenge mode]], [Normal Mode (Revenge Mode)] cannot be switched.

In addition, when the above embodiment is applied, when the production mode is controlled from [Challenge mode], [Rush mode], or [Hyper Rush mode] to [Normal mode] via a small hit puncture, A fixed effect mode different from the [normal mode (revenge mode)] may be set.

For example, when it is controlled to [normal mode] via time saving omission, [normal mode (revenge mode)] is set as a fixed production mode. After that, at a predetermined opportunity (for example, 20 times of variable display after short-time exit), various production modes ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rain mode) ]). On the other hand, when it is controlled to [normal mode] via a small hit blowout, [normal mode (sunny mode)] is set as a fixed effect mode.

[Game Flow (Modification)]
In the modification of the game flow shown in FIG. 9-28, a big hit occurs when the production mode is [normal mode], and after the big hit game state is finished, it is controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state), [ Challenge mode] (1 time reduction + 4 suspension rotations) or [Hyper Rush mode] (99 time reduction + 4 suspension rotations), and when a big hit occurs, [Rush mode] (7 rotations + 4 suspension rotations) Alternatively, it shifts to [Hyper Rush Mode] (time reduction 99 rotations + reserved 4 rotations), and when a big hit does not occur, it shifts to [Normal Mode].

(1) When the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag are not set, the production mode is set to [normal mode]. . (1D) A volcano background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image with a decorative pattern as an example of the effect when the effect mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)].

In the state of (3), all the display results are "missed", one variable display in the time saving state, and the suspension memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) When (1) and (1) are executed, the state (1) is established. In this example, when the state of (3) is controlled to the state of (1), the state of (1D) (the production mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)]) is controlled.

In the state of (4), all the display results are "missed", 7 variable displays in the time saving state, and the pending memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) When (1) and (1) are executed, the state (1) is established. In this example, when the state of (4) is controlled to the state of (1), the state of (1D) (the production mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)]) is controlled.
Others are the same as those in FIG. 9-6, so description thereof will be omitted.

(Means 09-1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-24 (15) and (16), in the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning game state, the decoration corresponding to the display result being "small winning" “2V2” is displayed (stop display, fixed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 as a symbol combination for a small hit. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), in the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal state that is controlled after the occurrence of a small hit blowout in the small win game state, a combination of decorative symbols , “222”, which is a combination of decoration symbols for a big win corresponding to the combination of decoration symbols for a small win “2V2”, is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG.

According to such a configuration, in the normal state (the performance mode is [normal mode]) controlled after the occurrence of the small winning puncture in the small winning game state, the combination of the decorative symbols is the combination for the big winning "222". ” is displayed, the display result is “missed” in all of the variable display of the specified number of times of time saving control and the suspension memory stored during the time saving state, so the normal state (the production mode is [Normal mode ]), it is normal state (production mode is [normal mode]) to generate a small hit puncture in the small winning game state and control to the normal state (production mode is [normal mode]) ) can be recognized by the player.

(Means 09-2)
As shown in step S09TM1070 in FIG. 9-9, when the display result is "small hit" when the production mode is any of [challenge mode], [rush mode], or [hyper rush mode] (YES in step S09TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 selects the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, [for the second special symbol] decorative symbol for big hit (for small win) combination determination table ( 9-10 (B2)). That is, in the processing of step S09TM1070, the "decorative symbol combination for big win" and the "decorative symbol combination for small win" are determined simultaneously as the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display.

According to such a configuration, when a small winning puncture occurs in the small winning game state, it is only necessary to display a combination of decoration patterns that have been determined in advance, and there is no need to perform complicated performance control. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to performance control when a hit puncture occurs.

(Means 09-3)
As described above, in the processing of step S09TM1070 in FIG. 9-9, as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, the "big winning combination of decorative symbols" and the "small winning combination of decorative symbols" are determined at the same time. is doing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-16, the end of the small winning game state before being controlled to the production mode of [normal mode] in the normal state that is controlled after the occurrence of the small winning puncture in the small winning game state In the effect determination processing at the end of the small win executed at the time, the effect control CPU 120 determines in advance to display the combination of the decorative symbols for the big win as the combination of the decorative symbols to be displayed after the end of the small win game ( step S09TM3040).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 (17) to (20), when the control is performed in the [normal mode] after the occurrence of a small hit puncture, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to the first mode. The promotion image (the first arrow image 09TM11A, the characters "Aim for V", the time gauge image 09TM11T) is erased, and (A) the combination of the decorative symbols for the big win and (B) the combination of the decorative symbols for the big win are reduced. Based on the fact that it is determined in advance to display in [normal mode] after the end of the winning game, the combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 (in this example, , "222") are displayed, and a sunny background image 09TM60A is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

According to such a configuration, when a small winning puncture occurs in a small winning game state, it is only necessary to display a combination of decoration patterns determined in advance together with a background image, and effect control when a small winning puncturing occurs. can reduce the processing burden associated with In addition, at the timing when the small hit blowout occurs, the first promotion image for immediately winning the V prize is deleted, and the effect image (decorative pattern, background image, etc.) corresponding to [Normal mode] is displayed. It is possible to suppress the player's feeling of regret when the small hit is punctured, and to direct the player's interest to the game in the normal state.

(Means 09-4)
As shown in Figure 9-6, in the state of (3) and (4), all the display results are "missing", the variable display of the specified number of times in the time saving state, and the start winning that occurred at this time When the corresponding hold storage is executed (after time saving), the state (1A) (production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]) is controlled. That is, the sunny background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decoration pattern after the time saving. As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), when the [normal mode] is controlled after the occurrence of a small winning puncture, a clear background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative pattern. Therefore, if it is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state without being controlled to the small-hit game state (when the time-saving omission occurs), and if it is controlled to the normal state without winning V during the small-hit game state (small hit A common sunny background image is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to change the background image according to the situation when the normal state is controlled, and the processing load of the effect control when the normal state is controlled can be reduced. In addition, since the common background image is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern regardless of the situation when the control is performed in the normal state, even when the control is performed in the [normal mode] after the occurrence of the small winning puncture. Also, the player's feeling of disappointment can be alleviated by using the same effect mode as after the short working hours.

(Means 09-5)
As shown in [Normal production mode (variant example)], when it is controlled to [Normal mode] via time saving, [Normal mode (Revenge mode)] is set as a fixed production mode be. After that, at a predetermined opportunity (for example, 20 times of variable display after short-time exit), various production modes ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rain mode) ]). On the other hand, when it is controlled to [normal mode] via a small hit blowout, [normal mode (sunny mode)] is set as a fixed effect mode.

That is, the volcano background image is displayed as a fixed background image when the [normal mode] is controlled via the time saving omission. After that, it is possible to switch to the sunny background image, the cloudy background image, and the rainy background image at a predetermined opportunity (for example, after the 20th fluctuation display is finished after the short working hours). On the other hand, when the game is controlled to [Normal Mode] via the small winning blowout, a sunny background image different from the volcano background image is displayed as a fixed background image.

According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to [normal mode] via time saving, by displaying a special background image (volcano background image) out of [normal mode], the player , it is possible to clearly recognize that the time-saving state has ended. Further, by displaying a special background image with a higher effect than a normal background image, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. On the other hand, when it is controlled to [Normal Mode] via a small hit blowout, a normal background image (sunny background image) with a more modest production mode than the special background image of [Normal Mode] is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of regret from increasing.

(Means 09-6)
As shown in FIG. 9-11, the effect control CPU 120 controls the pattern display of the image display device 5 as the effect to be executed when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big win" or a "minor win". In the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, at the timing when the decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed, the characters of the decorative patterns (in this example, composed of numeric patterns or alphabetic patterns and characters) perform actions (in this example, enlargement, action) is executed.

As shown in step S09TM1040 in FIG. 9-9, when the effect mode is [normal mode], the symbol stop motion effect can be executed, and as shown in step S09TM1080 in FIG. 9-9, the effect mode is any of the [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode], the symbol stop action effect can be executed. That is, even if the production mode is any production mode, the symbol stop operation production can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), after the occurrence of a small hit puncture, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination for the big win ("222" in this example) of the decorative symbols determined in the effect determination process at the end of the small win is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is not executing the symbol stop action effect, and the decorative symbol character is not performing any action.

According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved by executing the symbol stop action effect in the variable display in which the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". On the other hand, when it is controlled to the [normal mode] via the small winning puncture, the symbol stop action effect is not executed, so even though no advantageous event for the player has occurred, the action of the character It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding and subsequently increasing the player's sense of regret.

(Means 09-7)
As shown in FIG. 9-11, the effect control CPU 120 controls the pattern display of the image display device 5 as the effect to be executed when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big win" or a "minor win". In the areas 5L, 5C and 5R, at the timing when the decoration symbols should be stopped and displayed, the symbol stop sound effect is performed by reproducing and outputting the symbol stop sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in step S09TM1040 in FIG. 9-9, when the production mode is [normal mode], the symbol stop sound production can be executed, and as shown in step S09TM1080 in FIG. 9-9, the production mode is any of [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode], the symbol stop sound effect can be executed. That is, the symbol stop sound effect can be executed in any effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), after the occurrence of the small hit puncture, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the combination for the big win ("222" in this example) of the decorative symbols determined in the effect determination process at the end of the small win is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is not executing the symbol stop sound effect, and is not reproducing and outputting the symbol stop effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved by executing the symbol stop sound effect in the variable display in which the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". On the other hand, when it is controlled to the [normal mode] via the small winning puncture, the symbol stop sound effect is not executed, so that the symbol stop sound effect is produced even though no event advantageous to the player has occurred. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding and increasing the player's sense of regret after the execution of the above.

(Means 09-8)
As shown in FIG. 9-17, in the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "missing", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-17), The effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation B designation command causes the image display device 5 to display the result display. The timing for ending the time saving final variation display is the timing of T2 or T5 shown in FIG. 9-7, and the normal state is controlled at this timing. Therefore, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 when the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-18, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small hit game state (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the small hit end designation command, Based on the setting of the result display flag, the image display device 5 is caused to display the result display. In addition, when the small hit ending period (3 seconds) has passed, the CPU 103 is the timing ( Until the timing of T4A shown in FIG. 9-18, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to continuously display the result display. Therefore, when the game is controlled to the normal state without winning V during the small winning game state, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 during the small winning ending period of the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the effect determination process at the end of the small hit, if the V winning designation command is not received and the power failure recovery flag is set (step S09TM3080 and subsequent processes 2), by not executing the processing (step S09TM3070) for setting the result display flag, power failure occurs during the small winning game state, and V winning is not performed during the small winning game state after the power is turned on. Since the result display flag is not set when controlled to the normal state, the result display is not displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled to the normal state in the above situation.

According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to the normal state after the time saving or when it is controlled to the normal state via the small hit puncture, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period of time. , the player can accurately recognize information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded balls.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the small winning game state, a small winning blowout occurs during the small winning game state after the power is turned on, and control is performed to the normal state, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5. By not displaying, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of regret from increasing. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the performance control for displaying the result display is not performed after power failure occurs and the power is turned on, the accurate number of big hits and the total number of awarded balls can be obtained by the performance control CPU 120. It is possible to reduce the processing load of effect control after power-on, which is difficult to grasp.

(Means 09-9)
As shown in FIG. 9-17, in the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "missing", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-17), The effect control CPU 120 that has received the design determination B designation command causes the image display device 5 to display the result display over the design determination period (10 seconds).

In addition, the image display device 5 is displayed for a total of 1.5 seconds, which is the variable display period (1 second) of the reserved memory in which the display result is "missing" and the design determination period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to the variable display. to display the result display. Also, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (the period of T2A to T6 shown in FIG. 9-17).

As shown in FIG. 9-18, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small hit game state (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the small hit end designation command, The result display is displayed on the image display device 5 over the small winning ending period (3 seconds). That is, the display of the result display is started when the game is controlled to the small winning game state.

In addition, the image display device 5 is displayed for a total of 1.5 seconds, which is the variable display period (1 second) of the reserved memory in which the display result is "missing" and the design determination period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to the variable display. to display the result display. Also, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (period of T4A to T8 shown in FIG. 9-18). That is, the combined period of the variable display period of the four reserved memories and the design fixed period is the combined period of the four variable display periods of the reserved memory and the design fixed period shown in FIGS. 9-17. is a period of common length with

According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to the normal state after the time saving, the result display is displayed for a longer period than when it is controlled to the normal state via the small hit puncture, A player can accurately recognize information related to the number of big wins and the total number of awarded balls. Further, in the case of being controlled to the normal state via the small winning puncture, during the small winning ending period during the small winning game state, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the number of big wins and the number of awarded big wins are displayed. By making the player recognize the information related to the total number of winning balls, it is possible to suppress the player's feeling of regret due to the small hit being punctured.

(Means 09-10)
As shown in [Modified example of presence or absence of display of result display], (B-1) time-saving final fluctuation display in which the display result when the production mode is [Challenge mode] or [Rush mode] is "small hit" Or, (B-2) When a small hit blowout occurs in a small hit game corresponding to a short time fluctuation display in which the display result is a “small hit” when the production mode is [Hyper rush mode], production control The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to display the result display.

According to such a configuration, information on the actual number of big wins and the total number of awarded balls, which are smaller than the number of big wins that the player would normally have obtained and the total number of prize balls to be awarded, can be displayed in the game. Since it is not necessary for the person to recognize it, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Means 09-11)
As shown in FIG. 9-7, the variable display is executed seven times in the time saving state, and when all the display results are "off", the CPU 103 controls from the time saving state to the normal state (FIG. 9-7 timing of T5 shown in ).

In addition, as shown in <symbol confirmation designation command>, the "symbol confirmation B designation command" terminates the variable display in which the display result is "miss" in the time saving final fluctuation display, and the symbol confirmation period is 10 It is a production control command that specifies that it is seconds.

As shown in FIG. 9-17, in the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "missing", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-17), The effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation B designation command causes the image display device 5 to display the result display based on the reception of the symbol confirmation B designation command.

According to such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 can accurately recognize the timing of control from the time saving state to the normal state depending on whether or not the pattern confirmation B designation command is received, and the result display. It is also possible to accurately recognize the execution timing of the result presentation to be displayed.

(Means 09-12)
As shown in FIG. 9-18, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small hit game state (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the small hit end designation command, The result display is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the small hit end designation command and the setting of the result display flag.

According to such a configuration, even in a situation where a small hit blowout occurs, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result depending on whether or not the small hit end designation command is received and whether or not the result display flag is set. It is possible to accurately recognize the execution timing of the result effect that displays the .

(Means 09-13)
As shown in FIG. 9-19, the CPU 103 is the timing to start the next second special symbol variation display (variation display corresponding to the first suspension memory among the four suspension memories) (FIG. 9-19 At T4A shown in ), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern specification command displays the result on the image display device 5 based on the fact that the variation pattern specification command is received and the result display flag is set. is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even in a situation where a small hit has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result depending on whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received and whether or not the result display flag is set. It is possible to accurately recognize the execution timing of the result presentation to be displayed.

(Means 09-14)
As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the effect determination process at the end of the small hit, when the V winning designation command is not received and the power interruption recovery flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 It is decided to display a special combination of decoration symbols as a combination of decoration symbols to be displayed after the winning game is finished (step S09TM3080). This special combination of decorative patterns is a combination of decorative patterns dedicated to the restoration start screen during the small winning game when the power is cut off and the power is turned on during the small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (4), at the timing when the small hit ending period ends (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-26), the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)]. , and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the special combination of decoration symbols ("135" in this example) determined in the effect determination process at the end of the small win is displayed.

According to such a configuration, by displaying a special combination of decorative symbols ("135" in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the control situation of the current game state is changed to a small winning game. To allow a player to clearly recognize that power failure occurs during the state and control is made to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning game state after the power is turned on.

(Means 09-15)
As described above, the special combination of decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols that is different from the combination for losing decorative symbols. In particular, the special combination of decorative designs is a combination of decorative designs that is different from the second losing combination of decorative designs that result in the ready-to-win state.

According to such a configuration, in the reach state, the display result is likely to be a "big hit" or a "small hit". To give a player a sense of expectation and regret by not displaying a combination of decoration patterns that are in a ready-to-win state when a normal state is controlled without winning a V prize during a small winning game after being put in.例文帳に追加can be prevented.

(Means 09-16)
As shown in FIG. 9-20, in the demonstration display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the conditions for executing the customer waiting demo effect are established. If so (YES in step S09TM4030), it has been decided to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-21(A), when the customer waiting time has passed 60 seconds in a state where the power failure recovery flag is not set, condition No. When "SP-01" is established, it is decided to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the customer waiting waiting time of 10 seconds has elapsed in a state in which the power failure recovery flag is not set, condition No. "SP-02" has been established, and it has been decided to carry out a customer waiting demonstration.

According to such a configuration, in the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal state that is controlled after the occurrence of the small hit puncture, the combination of decorative patterns is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. The period from when the display is displayed to when the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed can be varied according to whether or not power failure occurs during the small winning game state, and the period until the customer waiting demo effect is executed. An appropriate period can be set as

(Means 09-17)
As shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), when the game state at the time of recovery is the small hit game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "0.5 seconds or less". When the game state at the time of power failure recovery is the small winning game state, the execution period of the recovery notification performance is set to be shorter than the remaining small winning period regardless of the remaining small winning period. ing. That is, before the small winning game state at the time of power failure recovery is completed, the recovery notification effect is completed, and the display of the recovery display is also completed.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), at the timing (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-26) after 0.5 seconds, which is the execution period of the restoration notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 returns the restoration notification. The effect is terminated, and the restoration display 09TM70 (in this example, an image including the characters "recovering from power outage") is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, the restoration notification effect is completed, and the restoration display 09TM70 (in this example, an image including the characters “recovering from power outage”) is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5. (Decorative pattern, small pattern, first reserved memory number display area, second reserved memory number display area, etc.) and a background image (in this example, a sunny background image) can be visually recognized.

According to such a configuration, after displaying the recovery display informing that the power has been restored, the background image and decoration pattern corresponding to the [normal mode] are immediately displayed even during the small winning game. Therefore, the player can grasp the situation in which the player should aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (perform a right shot) in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870). It is possible to reduce the possibility of generating a small hit puncture and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Means 09-18)
As shown in FIG. 9-12, in the small winning middle effect determination process, when the power failure recovery flag is not set, it is determined to execute the first promotion effect, and the power failure recovery flag is set. If so, it is decided to execute the second promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-13, the first promotional blinking effect of the first promotional effect is an effect in which the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L flashes (lights) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds. Among the second promotion effects, the second promotion blinking effect is an effect in which the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds.

According to such a configuration, in the present embodiment in which a big hit is generated by entering (V winning) the game ball into the V winning area 870 inside the V determination winning device 87 during the small winning game state, the small winning game To attract attention to the V judgment prize winning device 87 and ensure V prize (winning to the V prize area 870) by blinking (light emitting) the V judgment prize judgment device LED 87L provided in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the state. can be instructed to aim at the V-judgment winning device 87 (to hit to the right).

In addition, the player is notified that the situation is different from the normal small winning game by executing the second promoting flashing performance in a performance mode different from the first promoting flashing performance, and the first promoting flashing performance is performed. It is also possible to instruct to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (to hit right) in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870) in a highly urgent production mode.

(Means 09-19)
As shown in FIG. 9-13, the first promotional blinking effect of the first promotional effect is an effect in which the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, and the second promotional effect Among them, the second accelerated flashing effect is a effect of causing the V judgment winning device LED 87L to blink (light up) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by executing the first promotion flashing effect, an instruction is given to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (to hit to the right) in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870). At the same time, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game during the small winning game state. On the other hand, by executing the second facilitating flashing effect, it is instructed to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (to hit to the right) in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870), and a small hit. The remaining period of control to the game state is shortened, and the player can be made to recognize that the urgency of aiming at the V judgment prize winning device 87 is high.

(Means 09-20)
As shown in FIG. 9-13, the first promotional blinking effect of the first promotional effect is an effect in which the V-judgment winning device LED 87L flashes (lights up) in rainbow colors (seven colors). Among them, the second facilitating blinking effect is an effect of blinking (emitting light) the V judgment winning device LED 87L in red (single color).

According to such a configuration, by executing the first promotion flashing effect, an instruction is given to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (to hit to the right) in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870). At the same time, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game during the small winning game state. On the other hand, by executing the second facilitating flashing effect, it is instructed to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (to hit to the right) in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870), and a small hit. The remaining period of control to the game state is shortened, and the player can be made to recognize that the urgency of aiming at the V judgment prize winning device 87 is high.

(Means 09-21)
As shown in FIG. 9-13, the first promotion effect is a effect executed during a small winning game, and among the promotion flashing effects, the first promotion flashing effect, the promotion sound effect production, and the promotion image Among the effects, the effect includes the first promotion image effect.

The first accelerated flashing effect is a effect of flashing (emitting) the V-judgment winning device LED 87L in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds. Further, the promoting sound effect production is a production of reproducing and outputting the promoting sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. The first promotional image effect is a production for causing the image display device 5 to display the first promotional image. This first promotion image is an image including a first arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs to hit to the right in order to win the V prize.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-13, the second promotion effect is a effect executed during the small winning game, and is the second promotion flashing effect of the promotion flashing effect and the second promotion flashing effect of the promotion image effect. 2 promotional image effects.

The second accelerated flashing effect is a effect of causing the V-judgment winning device LED 87L to flash (light up) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds. Also, the second promotional image effect is a production for causing the image display device 5 to display the second promotional image. This second promotion image is an image including a second arrow image in the center of the screen instructing to hit to the right in order to win the V prize.

According to such a configuration, during the small winning game state in which power failure does not occur, by executing the first facilitation flashing effect, V determination for V winning (winning to V winning area 870) It is possible to instruct the player to aim at the winning device 87 (to hit to the right) and improve the interest of the game during the small winning game state.

On the other hand, power failure occurs during the small winning game state, and during the small winning game state after the power is turned on, the second promotion flashing effect is executed, thereby reproducing and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even in the state where the control is not activated, it is instructed to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (to hit to the right) in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870), and the small hit game state is entered. The remaining period of control is shortened, and the player can be made to recognize that the urgency of aiming at the V judgment prize winning device 87 is high.

(Means 09-22)
As shown in FIGS. 9-14, the first arrow image is a rainbow-colored (seven-color) image, and is a moving image that performs an animation action. As shown in FIGS. 9-15, the second arrow image is a white (single-color) image, and is a static image that does not perform an animation action.

According to such a configuration, by displaying the first arrow image during the small winning game state in which power failure does not occur, the V judgment winning is performed in order to make the V winning (winning to the V winning area 870). It is possible to instruct the player to aim at the device 87 (to hit to the right) and improve the amusement of the game during the small winning game state.

On the other hand, a power failure occurs during the small winning game state, and the second arrow image is displayed during the small winning game state after the power is turned on, resulting in V winning (winning to the V winning area 870). The player is instructed to aim at the V-judgment winning device 87 (perform a right-hand shot) in order to make the player win, and the remaining period of control to the small winning game state is shortened, and the urgency of aiming at the V-judgment winning device 87 is high. can be made to be recognized by the player.

(Means 09-23)
As shown in FIGS. 9-14, the first arrow image is a rainbow-colored (seven-color) image, and is a moving image that performs an animation action. As shown in FIGS. 9-15, the second arrow image is a white (single-color) image, and is a static image that does not perform an animation action. Therefore, the visibility of the second arrow image is lower than that of the first arrow image in terms of display color and animation action (presence or absence of action, display range, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by displaying the first arrow image during the small winning game state in which power failure does not occur, the V judgment winning is performed in order to make the V winning (winning to the V winning area 870). It is possible to instruct the player to aim at the device 87 (to hit to the right) and improve the amusement of the game during the small winning game state.

On the other hand, a power failure occurs during the small winning game state, and the second arrow image is displayed during the small winning game state after the power is turned on, resulting in V winning (winning to the V winning area 870). The player is instructed to aim at the V-judgment winning device 87 (perform a right-hand shot) in order to make the player win, and the remaining period of control to the small winning game state is shortened, and the urgency of aiming at the V-judgment winning device 87 is high. can be made to be recognized by the player.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, if a small hit puncture occurs in the small hit game state controlled while being controlled in [challenge mode] or [rush mode], the remaining time reduction control count is 1 or more 2, while continuously being controlled to the time-saving state, an example of being controlled to the production mode when a small hit occurs, but not limited to such a form, [challenge mode] or [rush mode] When a small hit blowout occurs in the small winning game state controlled when it is controlled, even if the remaining time saving control number is 1 or more, it is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, and the production mode is [Normal] mode].

(2) In the above embodiment, when a small hit blowout occurs in the small hit game state controlled when it is controlled to [Hyper Rush Mode], it is not controlled to the time saving state, but is controlled to [Normal Mode] Although an example is shown, it is not limited to such a form, even if a small hit blowout occurs in a small hit game state controlled when it is controlled in [Hyper rush mode], the remaining time reduction control number of times If it is 1 or more, it may be controlled to the [hyper rush mode] while continuing to be controlled to the time saving state.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win", an example is shown in which the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect are executed at a rate of 100%. When the display result is "big hit" or "minor hit", the pattern stop motion effect or the pattern stop sound effect may be executed at a rate different from 100%.

For example, the execution ratio of the pattern stop motion effect and the pattern stop sound effect may be changed according to the jackpot type, and the jackpot type is "symbol 10R short time big hit" or "11 (10) R short time jackpot via small hit". In the case, the symbol stop motion production and the symbol stop sound production are executed at a rate of 90%, and the jackpot types are "symbol 3R short time big hit", "small hit 6 (5) R short time big hit" or "small hit 4 (3) In the case of the R time-saving big hit, the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect are executed at a rate of 50%.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", the symbol stop action effect or the pattern stop motion effect is given at a rate of 100% regardless of which effect mode the effect mode is. Although an example in which the pattern stop sound effect is executed has been shown, this is not limited to such a form, and when the display result is "big hit" or "small hit", depending on the production mode, at a rate different from 100% A symbol stop motion effect or a symbol stop sound effect may be executed.

For example, when the production mode is controlled to [Normal mode], the pattern stop motion production and the pattern stop sound production are executed at a rate of 90%, and the production modes are [Challenge mode], [Rush mode], [ Hyper Rush Mode], the pattern stop motion effect and the pattern stop sound effect are executed at a rate of 50%.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, after the occurrence of a small hit blowout, the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and a combination of decorative patterns for a big hit is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When the pattern stop motion effect and pattern stop sound effect are not executed, but not limited to this form, after the small hit puncture occurs, the effect mode is [Normal mode (sunny mode)] When the combination of decoration symbols for a big win is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect may be executed.

For example, after the occurrence of a small hit puncture, the effect mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and the pattern executed when the combination of decorative patterns for the big win is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The stop motion effect is defined as "special pattern stop motion effect". This special pattern stop action production may be a production in which the decorative pattern character performs an action smaller than the pattern stop action production, or may be an production in which an action is larger than the pattern stop action production. Also, the execution period of the special symbol stop action presentation may be an execution period shorter than the execution period of the symbol stop action presentation, or may be an execution period longer than the execution period of the symbol stop action presentation.

In addition, after the occurrence of a small hit puncture, the performance mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and the pattern executed when the combination of decorative patterns for the big win is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The stop sound production is set to "special pattern stop sound production". This special pattern stop sound production is a production of reproducing and outputting sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R, and may be a production of reproducing and outputting sound effects at a volume smaller than that of the pattern stop sound production. An effect may be provided in which a sound effect is reproduced and output at a volume higher than that of the sound effect. Also, the execution period of the special symbol stop sound effect may be an execution period shorter than the execution period of the symbol stop sound effect, or may be an execution period longer than the execution period of the symbol stop sound effect.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, when a power failure occurs during a small winning game and the power is turned on, the special combination of decorative symbols is controlled to the normal state without winning V during the small winning game. ”, and an example in which a power failure occurs during a game state other than a small winning game state and the “initial combination of decorative symbols” when the power is turned on is different. The "special combination of decorative patterns" and the "initial combination of decorative patterns" may be common.

For example, both the "special combination of decorative patterns" and the "initial combination of decorative patterns" may be a combination of decorative patterns common to the "special combination of decorative patterns" (such as "135"). It may be a combination of decoration patterns (such as "123") common to the initial combination of ".

(7) In the above-described embodiment, in the time saving final variation display, at the timing when this variation display ends, the game state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, but not limited to such a form, In the time saving final variation display, the game state may be controlled from the time saving state to the normal state at a timing different from the timing when this variation display ends.

For example, in the time saving final variable display, the game state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state at the timing when this variable display starts.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, in the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal state that is controlled after the occurrence of a small winning puncture in the small winning game state, the decorative pattern, the background image, the effect image such as the active display is displayed, but it is not limited to such a form, and in the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal state that is controlled after the occurrence of a small hit blowout in the small win game state, the above various An effect image different from the effect image may be displayed.

For example, in the start screen of [Normal mode] of the normal state that is controlled after the occurrence of a small hit puncture in the small hit game state, a promotion image that promotes hitting left to win the first start winning hole (" An image including characters such as "Please return to left-handed") and an image notifying that the production mode has shifted to [Normal mode] (an image including characters such as "Enter sunny mode") are displayed.

(9) In the above embodiment, when the display result is "big win" or "minor win", both the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect are executed. Regardless of the mode, at least one of the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect may be executed when the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win".

For example, when the display result is "big hit" or "small hit", if the production mode is [normal mode], both the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect are executed, and the display result is If the performance mode is a performance mode other than [normal mode] at the time of "big hit" or "small hit", only the symbol stop motion performance is executed.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, when a variable display is executed in which the display result is a "minor hit", in the variable start effect determination process executed at the start of the variable display, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display. Although an example of simultaneously determining "a combination of decorative patterns for a big hit" and a "combination of decorative patterns for a small hit" is shown as a combination, the display result is not limited to such a form, and the display result is a "small hit". is executed, at a timing different from that at the start of the variation, a "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" may be determined as a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variation display.

For example, when a variable display in which the display result is a "small hit" is executed, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is "decorative symbol A combination for a small hit is determined, and the timing at the end of the fluctuation, the timing at the start of the small win game state, the predetermined timing during the small win game state, etc. A ``jackpot combination of decorative patterns'' corresponding to the ``combination for use'' is determined.

(11) In the above embodiment, (A) an example in which the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of receiving the small hit end designation command, or (B) the image display at the timing of receiving the variation pattern designation command Although an example in which a result display is displayed on the device 5 has been shown, examples (A) and (B) may be applied in accordance with the game situation without being limited to such a form.

For example, if there is a pending memory at the end of the time saving final fluctuation, (B) the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of receiving the variation pattern designation command, and if there is no pending memory at the time of the time saving final fluctuation, (A) A result display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of receiving the small hit end designation command.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the game state at the time of recovery is the small winning game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is longer than when the game state at the time of recovery is a game state other than the small winning game state. Although an example of shortening has been shown, the execution period of the restoration notification effect may be set according to the game state at the time of restoration without being limited to such a form.

For example, when the game state at the time of recovery is the small winning game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 0.5 seconds or less, and when the game state at the time of recovery is the big win game state, the recovery notification effect is set. is set to 0.5 seconds or less, and the game state at the time of recovery is a normal state excluding the period of the small winning game state and the period of the big winning game state, or the time saving except the period of the small winning game state. If it is in the state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 1 second.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, when the game state at the time of restoration is a small hit game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to a period shorter than the remaining small hit period. However, when the game state at the time of restoration is the small winning game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect may be set to a period longer than the remaining small winning period.

For example, when the game state at the time of recovery is the small winning game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 10 seconds. At this time, when the remaining small-hit period is shorter than 10 seconds, the restoration notification effect is terminated after the end of the small-hit game state.

(14) In the above embodiment, the second promotion effect is executed when the power is restored from the power outage, and when the display of the restoration display ends, various effect images (decorative designs, background images, etc.) are displayed. Although an example (becoming visible) has been shown, this is not limited to such a form, and when the power is restored from the power failure, the second promotion effect is executed, and even if the display of the recovery display ends, various effects Images (decorative designs, background images, etc.) may not be displayed (or may be difficult to see).

For example, the second promotion image effect of the second promotion effect is an effect of displaying the second promotion image over the entire screen of the image display device 5 . The second promotion image is a black image displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and includes a second arrow image in the center of the screen instructing the user to hit right in order to win a V prize, and a lower center portion of the screen. , and the characters "Please put a ball in V".

In this case, when the power is restored from the power outage, the second promotion effect is being executed, and even if the display of the recovery display ends, various effect images (decorative patterns, background images, etc.) become difficult to see, and the player hits right. By not displaying information other than promoting information, the player can grasp the situation in which the player should aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (perform a right-hand shot) in order to win a V prize (a prize to the V prize area 870). It is possible to further enhance the effect of preventing the player from being disadvantaged by lowering the possibility of generating a small winning puncture in the small winning game.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the V winning determination device and the big winning opening are different devices. may

The characteristic portion 09TM described above includes the following configurations.

The gaming machine of means 09-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display),
A variable means (V judgment winning device 87) controlled to an enterable state in which a game medium (game ball) can enter;
An advantageous state (big win game state) advantageous to the player, a special state (small win game state) which is different from the advantageous state and in which the variable means is controlled to the enterable state (small win game state), and after the advantageous state A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled in a special state (time saving state), which is a game state to be controlled and has a higher frequency of executing variable display than in the normal state,
The state control means (CPU 103)
When the game medium that has entered the variable means passes through the specific area (V winning area 870), the advantageous state (jackpot game state) can be controlled,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when it is controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the normal state (time saving control 99 times after the big hit, the time saving state is small When a win occurs and V prize is not won during the small win game, control is made to the normal state when the small win game state ends),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a display result of variable display of decoration identification information on display means (image display device 5),
The display control means is
It is possible to display a specific display result (combination for a jackpot of decoration symbols (such as "333")) as the display result corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state when being controlled to the normal state on the display means. and
A special display result (combination of decorative symbols for a small win ("3V3", etc.)) is displayed on the display means as the display result corresponding to being controlled to the special state when being controlled to the special state. is possible and
When the game medium does not pass through the specific region in the special state while being controlled to the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state. (When the V prize is not won during the small winning game and the normal state is controlled, the combination for the big winning of decorative symbols (“333” etc.) is displayed on the image display device 5.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the specific display result is displayed in the normal state after the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, thereby making the player aware that the control is in the special state. be able to.

The gaming machine of means 09-2 is
The gaming machine of means 09-1,
Determination means (processing for determining display results) for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state);
a display result determination means (process of step S09TM1070 for determining a jackpot combination of decorative symbols) for determining the specific display result based on the determination to control to the advantageous state;
The determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state (small hit game state),
The display result determining means determines the special display result and the specific display result based on the fact that it is determined that the special state is to be controlled when the special state is being controlled (processing in step S09TM1070). Then, it is possible to determine a combination of decorative patterns for a small hit and a combination of decorative patterns for a big hit),
The display control means (effect control CPU 120), when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when being controlled to the special state, in the normal state after the special state The specific display result determined by the display result determination means can be displayed on the display means (when the control is performed to the normal state without winning the V prize during the small winning game, the decoration determined in the process of step S09TM1070 The jackpot combination of symbols is displayed on the image display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled to the special state, it is sufficient to display the determined specific display result, and complicated effect control is performed. Since there is no need to perform

The gaming machine of means 09-3 is
The gaming machine of means 09-1 or 09-2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the special state (small winning game state) is being controlled, a predetermined launch display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image, a second promotion image) can be displayed on the display means,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state under the control in the special state, the predetermined shooting display is hidden and the background image of the decoration identification information corresponds to the normal state. It is possible to display the normal background image on the display means and display the specific display result on the display means (if the normal state is controlled without winning V during the small win game, the first promotion The image is erased, and the sunny background image corresponding to the [normal mode (sunny mode)] of the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the combination of decorative patterns for the jackpot ("222" etc.) is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the special state is controlled, the specific display result may be displayed together with the normal background image, and complicated effect control is required. Since there is no need to perform

The gaming machine of means 09-4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
Any normal background image among a plurality of types of normal background images (a sunny background image corresponding to [normal mode] in the normal state, cloudy background image, rainy background image, etc.) can be displayed on the display means,
when the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state; It is possible to display a common normal background image on the display means (when it is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state without being controlled to the small hit game state, and when it is controlled to the small hit game V A common sunny background image is displayed when it is controlled to the normal state without winning a prize)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to change the background image according to the situation when the normal state is controlled, and the processing load of effect control can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 09-5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-4,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A special background image can be displayed on the display means when the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, and the special background image is displayed for a predetermined period. After that, the normal background image can be displayed on the display means (when it is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning game state, after displaying the volcano background image over 20 fluctuations, the sunny background image, cloudy background image, or rainy background image),
When the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the normal background image is displayed on the display means without displaying the special background image on the display means. can be displayed (display a sunny background image, a cloudy background image, or a rainy background image without displaying the volcano background image when the normal state is controlled without winning a V prize during the small winning game)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the normal background image is displayed without displaying the special background image. , it is possible to prevent the player's sense of regret from increasing due to the special background image.

The gaming machine of means 09-6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-5,
The decoration identification information includes characters (decorative patterns are composed of numeric patterns and characters),
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the specific display result is displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state, an animation in which the character performs an action is displayed along with the specific display result. It is possible (when the combination of decoration symbols for the big win is stopped and displayed in response to being controlled to the big win game state in the normal state, a symbol stop action effect in which the character performs an action is executed),
when the game medium does not pass through the specific region in the special state when the control is in the special state, and when the specific display result is displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state; , the animation is not displayed (the character is controlled to the normal state without winning the V prize during the small winning game, and when the combination of decorative symbols for the big winning is displayed, the symbol stop motion presentation in which the character performs the action is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the animation is not displayed. You can prevent it from slipping.

The gaming machine of means 09-7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-6,
Equipped with sound output means (effect control CPU 120 for controlling speakers 8L and 8R),
The sound output means is
When the specific display result is displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state, a specific sound can be output (a jackpot game is played in the normal state). When the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in response to being controlled to the state, a symbol stop sound presentation is executed for reproducing and outputting a symbol stop sound effect),
When the special state is controlled to the special state and the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the specific display result is displayed on the display means. When the above-mentioned specific sound is not output (V prize is not won during the small winning game and is controlled to the normal state, and when displaying the combination for the big winning of the decorative symbols, the symbol stop sound effect is reproduced and output. do not perform the performance)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the specific sound is not output when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the player's feeling of regret increases due to the specific sound. You can prevent it from happening.

The gaming machine of means 09-8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-7,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, game value information relating to the game value given to the player can be displayed on the display means ( When the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning game state until the final change in the time saving state, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5),
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the special state is controlled, the game value information can be displayed on the display means corresponding to the end of the special state. (When the V prize is not won during the small winning game state and the normal state is controlled, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 during the small winning ending period of the small winning game state),
When a power failure occurs in the special state while being controlled to the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power failure is restored, the game value information is transmitted. Do not display on the display means (If power failure occurs during the small winning game state and the power is turned on and the V prize is not won during the small winning game state and is controlled to the normal state, the result display is not displayed. )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means by not displaying the game value information after the restoration of the power outage when it is difficult to grasp the correct game value information.

The gaming machine of means 09-9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-8,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, the game value information related to the game value given to the player can be displayed on the display means for a first period. (When it is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning game state until the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the result display is displayed for 10 seconds (symbol confirmation period)),
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the special state is controlled, the game value information is displayed on the display means for the first period in response to the end of the special state. can be displayed for a second period shorter than (when the control is made to the normal state without winning V during the small win game, the result display is displayed for 3 seconds (small win ending period))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the game value information, so that the player's sense of regret can be suppressed.

The game machine of means 09-10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-7,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, the game value information related to the game value given to the player can be displayed on the display means ( Displaying the result display when controlled from the time saving state to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning game state until the final fluctuation in the time saving state),
The game value information is not displayed on the display means when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the special state is controlled (without V winning during the small winning game). Do not display result display when controlled to normal state)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the player does not need to recognize the game value information regarding the game value which is smaller than the game value to be given when the game medium passes through the specific area, the decrease in interest is suppressed. can do.

The game machine of means 09-11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
A command transmission means (CPU 103) for transmitting commands related to games,
The state control means (CPU 103) changes from the special state to the normal state when variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state. It is controllable (in the [rush mode] of the time saving state, when the variation display is executed 7 times without occurrence of either "jackpot" or "jackpot via small hit", from the time saving state to the normal state controllable),
The display control means (performance control CPU 120), when receiving a special end command corresponding to the end of the variable display of the predetermined number in the special state, outputs the game value information related to the game value given to the player. It can be displayed on the display means (the result display is displayed based on the reception of the symbol confirmation B designation command)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the game value information can be displayed at appropriate timing when the special state is changed to the normal state.

The gaming machine of means 09-12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
Reservation storage means (CPU 103) for storing reservation information (reservation storage) relating to variable display that has not been executed;
A command transmission means (CPU 103) for transmitting commands related to games,
The state control means (CPU 103) changes from the special state to the normal state when variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state. It is controllable (in the [rush mode] of the time saving state, when the variation display is executed 7 times without occurrence of either "jackpot" or "jackpot via small hit", from the time saving state to the normal state controllable),
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state based on the predetermined number of variable displays, and when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the special state When a special state end command corresponding to the end is received, the game value information related to the game value given to the player can be displayed on the display means (7th fluctuation display in [rush mode] in the time saving state is executed, the display result becomes ``small win'', and if the V prize is not won during the small win game, the result display is displayed based on the reception of the small win end designation command)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the game value information at an appropriate timing when the special state ends when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state.

The game machine of means 09-13 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
Reservation storage means (CPU 103) for storing reservation information (reservation storage) relating to variable display that has not been executed;
A command transmission means (CPU 103) for transmitting commands related to games,
The state control means (CPU 103) changes from the special state to the normal state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state. It is controllable (in the [rush mode] of the time saving state, when the variation display is executed 7 times without occurrence of either "jackpot" or "jackpot via small hit", from the time saving state to the normal state controllable),
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state based on the variable display for the predetermined number of times, and when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the variable display is executed. When a command corresponding to is received, the game value information related to the game value given to the player can be displayed on the display means (the seventh variable display is executed in [rush mode] in the time saving state When the display result is "small win" and V prize is not won during the small win game, the result display is displayed based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the next variation display)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the game value information can be displayed at appropriate timing when the next variable display is performed when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state.

The game machine of means 09-14 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-13,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A specific display result can be displayed on the display means corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state when being controlled to the normal state (when being controlled to the normal state, it is controlled to the jackpot game state) correspondingly, the combination of decorative patterns for the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5),
When the game medium does not pass through the specific region in the special state when the special state is controlled, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state. (When the V prize is not won during the small winning game and the normal state is controlled, the combination for the big winning of the decorative symbols is displayed on the image display device 5),
When a power failure occurs in the special state when being controlled to the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power failure is restored, the specific display result and Different display results can be displayed on the display means (when power failure occurs during a small winning game and control is performed to the normal state without winning V during the small winning game after the power is turned on, decoration A special combination of decorative patterns (such as "135") that is different from the jackpot combination of patterns is displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect that the game medium did not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the recovery from the power interruption when the power interruption occurred in the special state while being controlled to the special state. Clearly recognizable by the player.

The game machine of means 09-15 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-14,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to display the ready-to-win state decoration identification information (the ready-to-win state decorative pattern combination ("2" and "2", etc.) on the display means,
When a power failure occurs in the special state while being controlled to the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power failure is restored, the specific display result and A combination of decoration identification information that does not include the ready-to-win mode can be displayed on the display means as a different display result. When it is controlled to a normal state without any other combination, a special combination (such as "135") of decorative patterns which does not include a reach mode different from the jackpot combination of decorative patterns is displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the power interruption occurs in the special state when the special state is controlled, and when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power interruption recovery, the game You can avoid giving people a feeling of regret.

The gaming machine of means 09-16 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-15,
From when the display result of the decoration identification information is displayed on the display means when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state under control to the special state until the demonstration effect is executed. During the period of , a power failure occurs in the special state when the special state is being controlled, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power failure is restored. A period longer than the period from when the display result of the identification information is displayed on the display means to when the demonstration effect is executed The customer waiting waiting time is 60 seconds until the execution of .On the other hand, power failure occurs during the small winning game, and control is performed to the normal state without V winning during the small winning game after the power is turned on. When this is done, the customer waiting waiting time until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed is 10 seconds.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to set an appropriate period from when the display result of the decoration identification information is displayed on the display means to when the demonstration effect is executed.

The game machine of means 09-17 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-16,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
In the event of a power outage, the display means can display a recovery display (recovery display) for notifying that the power has been restored when the power is restored from the power outage,
Power interruption occurs in the special state when it is controlled to the special state, and it is possible to end the restoration display before the end of the special state controlled after restoration of the power interruption (small win Power failure occurs during the game, and after the power is turned on, the recovery display is finished before the small winning game is finished),
It is possible to display the normal background image and decoration identification information corresponding to the normal state when the recovery display is finished and the special state is not finished (during the small winning game after the power is turned on). A sunny background image and a decorative pattern are displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the normal background image and the decoration identification information can be displayed before the end of the special state after notifying that the power has been restored, so that the player can enjoy the game medium. It is possible to grasp the situation in which the projectile should be fired toward a specific area.

The gaming machine of means 09-18 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-17,
Light-emitting means (V prize determination device LED87L) provided corresponding to the variable means;
A light emission control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling light emission of the light emission means,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
When it is controlled to the special state, it is possible to light the light emitting means in the first light emission mode (during the small winning game state, the V winning judgment device LED 87L is flashed in rainbow color at a blinking period of 0.5 seconds). Execute the first facilitating flashing effect that flashes (lights up) in (7 colors)),
A power failure occurs in the special state when being controlled to the special state, and in the special state controlled after the power failure is restored, the light emitting means is in a second light emission mode having a different light emission period from the first light emission mode. It is possible to emit light with (Electricity interruption occurs during the small win game state, and during the small win game state after the power is turned on, the V winning judgment device LED87L flashes red (one color ) flashes (lights up) to execute the second accelerated flashing effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when a power outage occurs in the special state while being controlled to the special state, the player can be made to pay attention to the variable means in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored. .

The game machine of means 09-19 is
The gaming machine according to means 09-18,
The first light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means blinks at a first period (the blinking period of the first accelerated blinking effect is 0.5 seconds),
The second light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means blinks in a second period longer than the first period (the blinking period of the second accelerated blinking effect is 2 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by causing the light emitting means to emit light in the first light emitting mode, the interest in the game can be improved, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light in the second light emitting mode, it is possible to indicate that the urgency is high. Players can be made aware of this.

The gaming machine of means 09-20 is
The gaming machine according to means 09-18 or means 09-19,
The first light emission mode is a mode in which the light emission means emits light in a plurality of colors (the light emission colors of the first accelerated blinking effect are rainbow colors (seven colors)),
The second light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means emits light in a smaller number of colors than in the first light emitting mode (the first accelerated blinking effect is red (one color)).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by causing the light emitting means to emit light in the first light emitting mode, the interest in the game can be improved, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light in the second light emitting mode, it is possible to indicate that the urgency is high. Players can be made aware of this.

The gaming machine of means 09-21 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-18 to 09-20,
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R) are provided,
When the special state is controlled, the light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting mode, and a predetermined shooting display prompting the shooting of the game medium to a predetermined area is displayed on the display means, and a predetermined sound is generated. Output from the sound output means (During the small winning game state, the V winning judgment device LED 87L blinks (lights) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a blinking period of 0.5 seconds. A first promotion image effect is executed to display a first promotion image including a first arrow image in the center of the screen instructing the image display device 5 to hit right to win the V prize, and promotion is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Executes the promotion sound effect production that reproduces and outputs the sound effect),
Power interruption occurs in the special state when being controlled to the special state, and in the special state controlled after restoration of the power interruption, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emission mode, and the predetermined emission indication is displayed. While the predetermined sound is displayed on the display means, the predetermined sound is not output from the sound output means (power failure occurs during the small winning game state, and the V winning judgment device A second accelerated blinking effect is executed in which the LED 87L blinks (lights up) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds, and the image display device 5 is instructed to hit right in order to win a V prize. While executing the second promotion image rendering for displaying the second promotion image including the second arrow image, the promotion sound effect rendering is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when power failure occurs in the special state, the player can play the game medium even if the sound output means is not activated in the special state controlled after the power failure is restored. It is possible to grasp the situation in which the projectile should be fired toward a specific area.

The gaming machine of means 09-22 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-18 to 09-21,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
displaying a predetermined shooting display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image and a second promotion image including a second arrow image) prompting the player to shoot a game medium into a predetermined area when being controlled to the special state; is displayable on the means,
When being controlled to the special state, the predetermined shot display can be displayed in the first mode (during the small winning game state, the display mode is a rainbow color (7 colors) image, and an animation action is performed. The first arrow image, which is a moving image, is displayed),
A power failure occurs in the special state when being controlled to the special state, and in the special state controlled after the power failure is restored, the predetermined firing display can be displayed in a second mode different from the first mode. There is (the display mode is a white (single color) image and a static image that does not perform animation operation during the small winning game state after the power is turned off during the small winning game state and the power is turned on). 2 showing the arrow image)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when a power failure occurs in a special state, by displaying the predetermined firing display in the second mode different from the first mode in the special state controlled after the power failure is restored, the urgency is improved. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is expensive.

The gaming machine of means 09-23 is
The gaming machine of means 09-22,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
displaying a predetermined shooting display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image and a second promotion image including a second arrow image) prompting the player to shoot a game medium into a predetermined area when being controlled to the special state; is displayable on the means,
The predetermined firing display of the second mode has a smaller operating range or fewer display colors than the predetermined firing display of the first mode (while the first arrow image is a moving image with many display colors). , the second arrow image is a still image with few display colors)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by displaying the predetermined firing display in the first mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, and by displaying the predetermined firing display in the second mode, it is possible to indicate that the urgency is high. Players can be made aware of this.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display,
variable means controlled to an enterable state in which game media can enter;
An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state that is different from the advantageous state and in which the variable means is controlled to the enterable state, and a game state that is controlled after the advantageous state and is higher than the normal state. a special state in which variable display is frequently executed, and a controllable state control means,
The state control means is
being controllable to the advantageous state when the game medium that has entered the variable means passes through the specific area;
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled to the special state, the control is possible to the normal state;
A display control means capable of displaying a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information on the display means,
The display control means is
a specific display result can be displayed on the display means as the display result in response to being controlled to the advantageous state when being controlled to the normal state;
a special display result can be displayed on the display means as the display result corresponding to being controlled to the special state when being controlled to the special state;
When the game medium does not pass through the specific region in the special state while being controlled to the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images